JP2019024723A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To reliably detect a fraud.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a winning detection sensor (an operation-start hole 1 switch 36a, an operation-start hole 2 switch 37a, an operation-start hole 3 switch 97a, an upper large winning hole switch 38a, a lower large winning hole switch 39a, and a winning hole switch 35a) capable of detecting ball entry in a winning area of a game area 32; a discharge sensor (an out switch 98) capable of detecting game balls discharged from the game area 32; and control means (a game control device 100) for executing control on the basis of these detection signals. Further, the game machine includes: calculation means (the game control device 100) for calculating a difference number between the number of balls detected by the winning detection sensor and the number of balls detected by the discharge sensor; and a difference counter capable of retaining the calculated difference number. When a value of the difference counter exceeds a prescribed number, the game machine determines to be abnormal and sets the value of the difference counter to the prescribed number.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 104

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game based on establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to a player when the result of the game becomes a special result.

Conventionally, in a pachinko machine, when a game is played based on the winning of a game ball at a start winning opening, and the result of the game is in a specific result mode, there is a special gaming state that makes it easy to win a special variable winning device. What happens is common. In addition, a predetermined winning ball is awarded when a gaming ball wins a winning opening provided in a gaming area including a start winning opening and a special variable winning device (see, for example, Patent Document 1). .

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-140468

In such a gaming machine, there is a risk that an act of misrecognizing a game ball at a winning opening and trying to obtain a game execution right or a prize ball illegally is performed. An object of the present invention is to reliably detect fraud.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1
In a gaming machine that executes a game based on establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result,
A game area where game balls can flow down,
A winning area provided in the gaming area and allowing a game ball to win;
A winning detection sensor capable of detecting a game ball won in the winning area;
A discharge sensor capable of detecting a game ball discharged from the game area;
Control means for performing control based on detection signals from the winning detection sensor and the discharge sensor,
The control means includes
A calculating means for calculating a difference number between the number detected by the winning detection sensor and the number detected by the discharge sensor;
A difference counter capable of holding the difference number calculated by the calculation means,
It is determined that an abnormality has occurred when a value of the difference counter exceeds a predetermined number, and the value of the difference counter is set to the predetermined number.

  According to the present invention, an illegal act can be reliably detected.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the structure of a collective display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a special figure 1 indicator. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a special figure 2 indicator. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a special figure 2 indicator. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the opening / closing pattern of a special fluctuation prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the opening / closing pattern of a special fluctuation prize-winning apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flowchart explaining a switch reading process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining fraud & winning prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining a production command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a gaming machine state check process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure hold information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 game processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening switch monitoring process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart for explaining ordinary processing. FIG. 2 is a flowchart for explaining ordinary processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a 2 byte distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the high probability variation frequency update process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart for explaining a process transition setting process during fluctuation. FIG. 2 is a flowchart for explaining a process transition setting process during fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 fluctuation process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation process. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 1 display process transition setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 2 display process transition setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 1 display process transition setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 2 display process transition setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process transition setting process. FIG. 6 is a flowchart for explaining a process transition setting process during small hitting fanfare. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a process transition setting process during small hitting fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 1 during a special winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 2 during the big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit operation | movement transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 big hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining a middle hit process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining a design fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart explaining a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a board radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a start port 1 signal edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a main prize ball signal edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol determination frequency signal edit process. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the display mode at the time of the switching of a main fluctuation symbol. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a skip production. It is a time chart explaining skip production. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a skip production process. It is a flowchart explaining a display switching process. It is a figure explaining the modification of a display. It is a time chart which shows an example of the output mode of external information. It is a time chart which shows an example of the output mode of external information. It is a flowchart explaining a status display edit output process. It is a flowchart explaining a difference calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an out number error monitoring process. It is a figure explaining an example of a change of the value of each counter field. It is a figure explaining the fluctuation pattern table in the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the fluctuation pattern table in the 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure information setting process in a 1st modification. It is a figure explaining an example of a change of the value of each counter field in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the winning number counter update process in a 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the status display edit output process in a 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the status display edit output process in a 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the winning number counter update process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the difference calculation process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the state display edit output process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the out number error monitoring process in the 4th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of a change of the value of each counter field in the 4th modification.

<First Embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is an outer frame (
The support frame 11 is assembled so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is a front frame 1
2 is housed in a housing portion (not shown) formed on the front side. Front frame (body frame) 1
2, a glass frame 15 (with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front of the game board 30 (
A transparent plate holding frame is attached.

In addition, lamps and LEDs are incorporated in the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 to provide decorations, effects, and notifications when abnormalities occur (for example, if a payout abnormality occurs, the lamps and LEDs are abnormally notified colors (for example, red) The frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing)), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effects) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. Note that a discharge abnormality notification lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, on the lower part of the front frame 12 is an upper plate 21 (not shown) for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (
A storage tray), an upper tray ball outlet 22 from which a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 flows out, and a game ball paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full A lower tray (receiving tray) 23 to be stored, an operation unit 24 of a hitting ball launcher, and the like are provided. Furthermore, the upper plate 21
An effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided on the upper edge of the player.
A production button 25 is provided. In addition, a touch panel 29 for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25.
Further, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12. In this embodiment, the touch panel 2
9 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25, and the display surface of the sub display device is provided. A touch panel 29 may be provided.

Further, to the right of the production button 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a discharge button that is operated to discharge the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28, Balance display section for displaying the balance of the prepaid card (not shown)
Etc. are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the game ball 30 is supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game board 30 when the player turns the operation unit 24 to rotate.
Fire toward the game area 32 on the front. Further, when the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, an effect or the like in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decoration special map variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. Further, on the left side of the game area 32, a guide wall 491 is provided along the outer peripheral wall 31 to form a guide path 490 that guides the launched game ball to a predetermined position in the game area 32.

In the game area 32, a center case (game production component) 40 provided with a display device 41 is disposed substantially at the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so as to make it difficult for a game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (CRT). In an area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information relating to a game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the presentation effect is displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen. In addition, the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 that produces a game effect by operating. The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (normal figure start gate) 34 for providing a start condition of the normal figure change display game is provided. A game ball won in the usual start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 12). In addition, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, two general winning holes 35 are arranged. The game balls that have won the general prize opening 35 are awarded the prize opening switch 35a (FIG. 1).
2).

Below the center case 40, a first start winning opening 36 (start winning opening, start winning area) and a second special figure change display that give start conditions for the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game). A winning device 90 having a second start winning port 97 (start winning port, start winning area) for providing a game (special figure 2 variable display game) start condition is provided. The winning device 90 includes a sorting member 92 that alternately distributes the game balls flowing into the upper inflow port 91 into the first starting winning port 36 and the second starting winning port 97. The distribution member 92 is rotatable about a rotation axis along the front-rear direction, and the direction in which the distribution member 92 tilts is changed by the weight of the inflowing game ball, and the first start winning opening 36 on the left side and the second on the right side. The game balls are alternately distributed to the start winning opening 97. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 12), and the game ball that has won the second start winning opening 97 is the start opening 3 switch 97a.
(See FIG. 12). Further, below the winning device 90, there is provided an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won the winning port or the like.

Also, on the right part of the center case 40, there is provided an ordinary variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) for giving a start condition for the second special figure changing display game. The normal variation winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by opening in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the right. A closed state (disadvantageous for the player) is maintained in which the game ball cannot flow in almost vertically. Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the normal electric fluctuation is caused to rotate so that the upper end side is tilted rightward by the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 12) as a driving device. The game device can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which a game ball easily flows into the winning device 37. The game ball that won the normal variation winning device 37 is the starting port 2
It is detected by the switch 37a (see FIG. 12). The normal variation winning device 37 may be awarded even in the closed state, and it may be more difficult to win in the closed state than in the open state.

On the right side of the normal variation winning device 37, a flow down path 615 is formed that is covered with a transparent cover on the front side and communicates with the upper and lower sides. A game ball that has not won the normal variation winning prize device 37 passes through the flow down passage 615 and moves downward. Flow down. A guiding portion 616 is provided below the downflow path 615. The guiding portion 616 has an upper surface 617 that is inclined to the left.
7 and is guided to the left where the special variable winning device 38 exists. In addition, the guidance unit 616 is provided with an information display device 630 that displays information related to the special figure variation display game.

The information display device 630 includes a first information display unit that displays the number of first start memories that are the right to execute the first special figure variable display game, and a second start memory that is the right to execute the second special figure variable display game. The 2nd information display part which displays the number of these is provided. In addition, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the first special figure variable display game is displayed by the fourth symbol separately from the decorative special figure variable display game displayed by the first to third symbols on the display device 41. In the third information display unit or the display device 41, the first to third
A fourth information display unit for displaying a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the second special figure variable display game by a fourth graphic is provided separately from the decorative special figure variable display game displayed by the graphic.

Each of the first information display unit and the second information display unit is configured by two light emitting members, and each of the third information display unit and the fourth information display unit is configured by one light emitting member. In the second display device, these six light emitting members are arranged side by side in two rows on the left and right. The upper two light emitting members in the right row constitute a first information display portion, and the upper two light emitting members in the left row constitute a second information display portion. Further, the lower one light emitting member in the right column constitutes a third information display portion, and the lower one light emitting member in the left row constitutes a fourth information display portion.

Each of the first information display unit and the second information display unit is composed of two light emitting members, but a design is applied around each information display unit to show that the two light emitting members are related. At first glance, it can be seen that one information display unit is composed of two light emitting members. In addition, each of the third information display unit and the fourth information display unit is composed of a single light emitting member, but the design around these information display units is designed to be understood to be independent. At first glance, it can be seen that the information display unit is composed of one light emitting member. In addition, the design around the light-emitting member has a sense of unity with the design of the entire gaming machine so that the aesthetic appearance is not impaired. In addition, the design around the light emitting member is
It is not formed with a sticker or the like, but is formed on a member constituting the guiding portion 616, so that labor and cost during manufacturing can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the lower right part of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a first special variable winning device (upper large winning opening) that can be converted into a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. 38 is disposed. The first special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing member 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side. Thus, the open / close member 38c is retracted from the closed state (closed state unfavorable for the player) where the upper prize winning opening is closed, and the open state (advantageous for the player) is able to accept the game ball flowing down the game area 32. State)
Convert to In other words, the first special variable winning device 38 includes an upper prize winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 38c that is driven by an upper prize winning solenoid 38b (see FIG. 12) as a driving device. During the first special game state or the second special game state based on the small hit), the game ball can easily flow into the upper prize winning opening by converting the upper prize winning opening from the closed state to the opened state. A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In addition, an upper prize port switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 12) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the upper prize hall is disposed in the upper university prize opening (winning area). Has been.

Also, below the first special variable prize winning device 38, a second special variable prize winning device (lower large prize opening) 39 that can be converted into a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. Is arranged. The second special variation winning device 39 has an attacker-type opening / closing member 39c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side, and as a result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Thus, the open / close member 39c is retracted from the closed state (closed state unfavorable for the player) in which the lower prize-winning opening is closed, and the open state in which the open / close member 39c can accept the game ball flowing down the game area 32 (advantageous for the player). To the state). That is, the second special variable winning device 39 is a lower large winning port solenoid 39b (FIG. 12) as a driving device.
The lower big prize opening which is opened and closed by the opening and closing member 39c driven by the reference), and in the special gaming state (the first special gaming state based on the big hit and the second special gaming state based on the big hit) Is converted from a closed state to an open state, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the lower prize winning opening and giving a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. In addition, a lower large prize opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 12) is provided inside the lower big prize opening (winning area) as detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the lower big prize opening. Has been.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, among the game areas 32 where the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches a game ball into the left game area (so-called left-handed), whereby the first start winning port 36 and the second start winning port 97 of the winning device 90.
The player can aim to win the general winning opening 35 and fires a game ball to the right game area (so-called right-handed) so that the normal start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 3
8. It is possible to aim for winning in the second special variable winning device 39.

In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that form the special figure fluctuation display game, and a batch of various information are displayed. A display device 50 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 3, the collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 display for a special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure fluctuation display section) composed of a 7 segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. 51 (D1
) And special figure 2 fluctuation display game special figure 2 display (second special figure fluctuation display section) 52 (D2),
Special figure 1 hold display 54 (D11, D12) for notifying start memory number of special figure 1 variable display game composed of LED lamps, Special figure 2 hold display for notifying start memory number of special figure 2 variable display game 55 (D13, D14).

Further, the collective display device 50 has round display units 60 (D3 to D7) for displaying the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of times of opening / closing the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39),
A first game state display unit 7 for notifying whether the time is short (in the case of normal power support or in a specific game state)
6 (D9), a second game state display unit 77 (D8) is provided which serves as a first notification means for notifying a left-handed (normal hit) and a right-hand hit according to the game situation. In addition, the gaming machine 10
A third gaming state display unit (third gaming state display, probability state display unit) 78 (D17) is provided for displaying that the probability state of jackpot is a high probability state when the power is turned on. In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a general map display 74 (D10, D18) for a general map variable display game,
There is a general map hold indicator 75 (D15, D16) for informing the start memory number of the general map variable display game.

The special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, for example, during the execution of the fluctuation display game, that is, while the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is being performed on the display device 41, The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to 100 milliseconds, for example. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 display 51, as shown in FIG. 3B, it is provided on the lower right side of 7 segments in addition to the central segment. In addition, the eighth segment is also blinked to indicate that it is changing, so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be distinguished. Moreover, you may display that it is changing by displaying sequentially the some identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying a special figure fluctuation display game. When the result of the game is “out of”, as a result mode of out of game, for example, the central segment (in the case of Special Figure 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side) is turned on, and the result of the game is In the case of “winning”, the game results are displayed with the result modes (for example, numbers and symbols) other than the off-result mode being turned on as the winning result mode (special result mode).

The special figure 1 holding display 54 is a first start winning opening 36 that is a variation start condition of the special figure 1 display 51.
Among the number of winning balls, the number of undigested balls (first start memory number = holding number) is displayed by turning off and turning on (flashing) a plurality of LEDs as shown in FIG. Special figure 2 hold indicator 55 is special figure 2
FIG. 3C shows the number of undigested balls (second start memory number = reserved number) among the number of winning balls to the normal variation winning device 37 and the second starting winning port 97, which are the conditions for starting the change of the display 52. Multiple L's as shown in
Displayed by turning off the ED and turning on (flashing). The round display unit 60 is composed of LED lamps and the like, and when not in the special game state, all the LEDs are turned off and selected according to the result in the special game state as shown in FIG. The LED is turned on corresponding to the number of rounds. Note that the round display unit may be a seven-segment display.

As shown in FIG. 3E, the first game state display unit 76 turns on the LED when in the time-short state, and turns off the LED when not in the time-short state. The second game state display unit 77 is shown in FIG.
In the case of a left-handed gaming situation (when hitting normally), the LED is turned off, and in the case of a right-handed gaming situation (when hitting right), the LED is turned on. 3rd game state display part 7
As shown in FIG. 3 (e), when the power is turned on, the LED is turned on when it is in a high probability state, and when not in the high probability state, the LED is turned off.

The normal map change display game on the general map display 74 is displayed during the change display of the general map change display game.
The change symbol number shown in FIG. 3 (g) is alternately changed, and two LEDs are alternately lit to indicate that the change is in progress. If the result is a win, it is turned on in a lighting manner according to the hit type and indicates that it is a hit, and if the result is out of order, the two LEDs are turned off to indicate that they are out of place. . The general map hold indicator 75 displays the number of undigested balls (the number of normal map start memory = the number of reserves) out of the number of passing balls of the general map start gate 34, which is the variation start condition of the general map indicator 74, as shown in FIG. As shown in f), display is performed by turning off and turning on (flashing) a plurality of LEDs.

FIG. 4 shows a display mode in the special figure 1 display 51. Special Figure 1 Fluctuation display During the fluctuation display of the game, the center segment and the 8th segment provided on the lower right side of 7 segments are set to 100.
Flashes at a period of m seconds. And a result is displayed by lighting in the aspect corresponding to a result with completion | finish of fluctuation | variation time. In some cases, a plurality of lighting modes are associated with one result, and in this case, any one lighting mode is selected from among these by a random number or the like.

5 and 6 show the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52. FIG. Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Display During the fluctuation display of the game, the center segment blinks at a cycle of 100 milliseconds. And a result is displayed by lighting in the aspect corresponding to a result with completion | finish of fluctuation | variation time. In some cases, a plurality of lighting modes are associated with one result, and in this case, any one lighting mode is selected from among these by a random number or the like.

FIG. 7 shows the probability of jackpot and jackpot, the probability of jackpot type when winning the jackpot, and the sort probability of jackpot type when winning the jackpot. The big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 is set (the consecutive accessory operating device is operated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, the “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having a meaning.

The jackpot probability, which is the probability of a big hit (first special result), is common to Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2.
The probabilities in the normal gaming state that is a low probability state and the specific gaming state that is a high probability state are shown in FIG.
The probability is as shown in (a). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, after the special gaming state (first special gaming state) based on the big hit, it becomes a high probability state, and a predetermined number of times (here 50 times).
When the special figure variation display game is executed, a low probability state is set. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of either the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Both are in a high probability state.

The small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), is as shown in FIG. 7B. This small hit probability is lower in special figure 2 than in special figure 1. This
Special figure 2 In a high probability state in which a variable display game is mainly executed, small hits occur frequently so that the game flow is not interrupted. The small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state and the big hit probability. In the lottery for the big hit and the small hit, the big hit and the small hit do not overlap.

FIG. 7 (c) shows the types of jackpots that can be selected in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the special variable winning devices and distribution probabilities that are released for each jackpot type, and FIG. 1 and 2 show the types of small hits that can be selected, the special variable winning device that is opened for each type of small hit, the opening time, the number of times of opening, and the distribution probability. In addition, for 2R probability variation D1 of special figure 2, you can hardly expect the ball,
Since it is a big hit, the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in a high probability state is set to 50 again. In the special game state based on the 2R probability variation D1, an effect is provided such that the number of games that can be executed in a high probability state is added.

FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 show the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game. FIG. 8 shows the contents of the variation pattern table in which the types and variation rates of variation patterns in the normal gaming state (low probability state) are defined. A common variation pattern table is used for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game.

FIG. 8A shows a variation pattern table used when the result is out of order and the starting memory number is 1 to 3. The start memory number here is the total number of the first start memory and the second start memory. When the starting memory number is 4 or more, the selectivity of 3000 ms or 7000 ms without reach, which is a variation pattern with a short variation time, is increased, and the selectivity of a variation pattern with a long variation time is decreased. Has been.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. A gaming state in which the gaming state is advantageous to the player when it becomes a special result mode (special gaming state)
In the gaming machine 10 that becomes, at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed,
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. For example, a state where so-called full-rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same The state of identification information,
However, it is also possible to set the reach state except for the special result mode), and display the remaining one variable display area in a variable manner from the reach state.

This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expectation value is different). As a reach effect, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 Reach (SP2 Reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore,
The state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

FIG. 8B shows a variation pattern table used when the result is a big hit (first special result). In the case of a big hit, the variation pattern is selected regardless of the number of starting memories. Also, in the case of a big hit, the reach state is always set. FIG. 8C shows a variation pattern table used when the result is a small hit (second special result). The case of the small hit is the same as the case of the big hit, and the variation pattern is selected regardless of the starting memory number. In addition, in the case of a small hit, a reach state is always set.

FIG. 9 shows the contents of a variation pattern table in which the types and variation rates of variation patterns in a specific gaming state (high probability state) are defined. A common variation pattern table is used for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game.

FIG. 9A shows a variation pattern table used when the result is out of order and the starting memory number is 1 to 3. The start memory number here is the total number of the first start memory and the second start memory. When the starting memory number is 4 or more, the selection rate of 1000 ms or 2000 ms without reach, which is a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time, is increased, and the selection ratio of other fluctuation patterns with a long fluctuation time is low. Has been. 9 (b) and (c
) Shows a variation pattern table used when the result is a big hit (first special result) and a variation pattern table used when the result is a small hit (second special result). In the case of big hit or small hit, the variation pattern is selected regardless of the number of starting memories.

FIG. 10 and FIG. 11 show special in special game state (first special game state) based on big hit (first special result) and special game state (second special game state) based on small hit (second special result). The open / close pattern of the variable winning device is shown. FIG. 10 shows the opening / closing pattern of the special variable winning device for the big win type and the small hit type that can be selected in the special figure 1 variable display game, and FIG. 11 shows the big hit type and the small type that can be selected in the special figure 2 variable display game. The open / close pattern of the special variable prize-winning device in the hit type is shown.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10, in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, when the big hit type is a big hit of 16R probability variation A1, the first special variable prize winning device 38 is opened according to the big prize opening / closing pattern 1 on the special figure 1. . In the special prize 1 upper winning opening / closing pattern 1, after the fanfare period of 5000 ms, an opening period of 29000 ms is set in the first round (1R). Then 20
A round in which an interval period of 00 ms and an opening period of 29000 ms are set is repeated up to 16 rounds, and after the ending period of 11000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

In addition, the time described in the interval period and the ending period in each open / close pattern shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 is a time obtained by adding the remaining sphere processing time and the interval time or ending time. For example, the interval period in the special prize opening 1 on the special figure 1 is 2000 m.
Of these, 1400 ms in the first half is the remaining sphere processing time, and 600 ms in the second half is the interval time. Further, the ending period in the special prize opening / closing pattern 1 on the special figure 1 is 11000 ms, of which 1400 ms in the first half is the remaining ball processing time and 9 in the second half.
600 ms is the ending time.

For other open / close patterns, the fanfare period, the open period, the interval period (including the remaining ball processing time) and the ending period (including the remaining ball processing time) as shown in the figure
Accordingly, the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39 is opened. Note that the special prize opening / closing pattern 5 on the special figure 2 in FIG.
An opening period of 7200 ms is configured by repeating opening of 200 ms and closing of 1500 ms 11 times and then opening 25000 ms. Also, in any open / close pattern, when a predetermined number of winnings are made in each round, the opening period of the round ends at that time.

In addition, when the opening / closing mode is the same from the start to the middle of the special gaming state, for example, as shown in FIG.
The effects on the display device 41 may be the same so that it is difficult to determine the big hit type or the small hit type. Further, during the special gaming state, information suggestion or notification that enables discrimination of the big hit type or the small hit type may be performed.

In addition, when a big hit is executed by any of the special winning opening opening / closing patterns 4 and 5 on the special figure 2, the effect of whether or not the long open round is executed again after the end of 4R (whether or not to continue) is provided. You may make it perform. In this case, for example, if the special winning opening / closing pattern 4 on the special figure 2 is opened, the short opening is performed from 5R to 16R which is the final round, and the big hit is completed. 1 to 5R of the special prize opening / closing pattern 4 on the special figure 2 described above.
After a short opening that is substantially the same as that up to 6R is performed, a long opening (25000 ms) is performed, and thereafter, the same long opening as that up to 4R is resumed. Therefore, if the special winning opening / closing pattern 4 on the special figure 2 is used, the time from 5R to 15R is used, and if the special winning opening / closing pattern 5 on the special figure 2 is used, the time between the multiple short openings of 5R is used. If the special winning opening / closing pattern 4 on the special figure 2 is continued, the result that the long opening is not resumed (the big hit game does not continue) is notified. By notifying the result that the long release is resumed (the big hit game is continued), the player may be given a sense of expectation.

From the above, the special results include the first special result (big hit) that can generate the first special gaming state, and the second special game that has a lower game value that can be given to the player than the first special gaming state. The second special result (small hit) that can generate the state is included.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game. Further, when the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Also,
When the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a hit (special result). In addition, when the first special gaming state that is a special gaming state based on the big hit and the second special gaming state that is a special gaming state based on the small hit are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special gaming state.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game ball (from a launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32 (
A game is played when a pachinko ball is launched. The game balls that have been launched flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various locations within the game area 32, and a general winning opening 35 that forms a winning area, The first start winning port 36 or the second start winning port 97 of the winning device 90, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 are won or the lowermost part of the game area 32 It flows into the outlet 30a provided in the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, a game ball is placed in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 97 of the winning apparatus 90, the ordinary variable winning apparatus 37, the first special variable winning apparatus 38, or the second special variable winning apparatus 39. When winning a prize, the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning prize opening is discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 12) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15. .

A winning ball to the first starting winning opening 36 is detected as a starting winning ball of the special FIG. 1 variable display game by a start opening 1 switch 36a provided therein, and a predetermined upper limit number (
For example, 4) is stored as a limit. The special figure 1 variable display game is ready to start, and
When the first start memory number is 0 and a game ball wins the first start winning opening 36, the first start memory is stored with the start right and the first start memory number is incremented by one. At the same time, based on the first start memory, the special figure 1 variable display game is started, and at this time, the first start memory number is decremented by one. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 1 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 1 variable display game has not ended or is in a special gaming state In addition, when a game ball wins the first start winning opening 36, if the first start memory number is less than the upper limit number, the first start memory number is incremented by 1 and one first start memory is stored. . When the first start memory number becomes 1 or more, the special figure 1 variable display game can be started (the previous special figure 1 variable display game ends or the special game state ends). The start memory number is decremented by 1, and the special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the stored first start memory.

The winning ball to the second starting winning port 97 is detected as a starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game by a start port 3 switch 97a provided inside. A winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 is detected as a starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game by a start port 2 switch 37a provided inside. In the state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, if there is a winning at the second start winning opening 97 or the normal variable winning device 37, the special figure 2 variable display game is immediately executed based on the winning. . Also, when the special figure 2 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 2 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 2 variable display game has not ended, or when the special game state has been entered. In addition, when a game ball wins the second start winning opening 97 or the normal variation winning device 37, if the second start memory number is less than the upper limit number, the second start memory number is incremented by 1 and one second start memory is obtained. Will be remembered. And the second start memory number is 1
In the above state, when the special figure 2 variable display game can be started (end of the previous special figure 2 variable display game or end of the special game state), the second start memory number is decremented by one. Based on the stored second start memory, the special figure 2 variable display game is started.

Further, at the time of detecting the starting winning ball, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as starting storage information, and the extracted random number value is stored in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 12). Is stored as a special figure start memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times for each of the first start memory and the second start memory). The number of special figure starting memories stored is the special figure 1 hold indicator 5 of the collective display device 50.
4. The special figure 2 is displayed on the hold display 55 and also displayed on the display device 41 of the center case 40 as a decorative special figure start memory display.

Based on the first start memory, the game control device 100 plays the special figure 1 variation display game with the special figure 1 display 51 (first variation display device), and based on the second start memory, the special figure 2 display 52 (second
A special figure 2 variable display game is performed on the variable display device. The special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be executed at the same time. While one of the special figure fluctuation display games is being executed, the other special figure fluctuation display game has a special result (big hit or small hit). If it becomes, the one special figure variation display game is ended as a result other than the special result (out-of-order result).

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after the variable display is performed in the display form as shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 5, the predetermined result form as shown in FIG. Stop display. And
When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display form of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result form corresponding to the first special result (big hit result form). Thus, the first special gaming state (so-called big hit state) is obtained. In addition, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, a special result form (small hit result form) in which the display form of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result. Becomes a small hit, the second
It becomes a special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special figure 1 display 51 serves as a first fluctuation display means capable of displaying a first fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game) based on winning of a game ball in the first start winning opening 36. Also, the second variation in which the special figure 2 display 52 can display the second fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 or the second start winning opening 97. It serves as a display means.

In response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, a plurality of types of decoration identification information (numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are displayed in a variable manner on the display device (image display device) 41. The special figure variation display game to be executed is executed. The decorative special figure fluctuation display game includes a decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and a decorative special figure 2 fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. In addition, one set as the main display symbol is displayed larger than the other. Then, a variation display is performed in accordance with the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and a display corresponding to the result is performed with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special diagram variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 displays a decoration variation display game in which the decoration identification information is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the first variation display game (Special Figure 1 variation display game) and the second variation display game (Special Figure 2 variation display game) ( A decoration variation display means capable of displaying a decoration special map variation display game) is provided. It should be noted that separate display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one decorative special figure variable display game may be displayed. In addition, gaming machine 1
The special figure fluctuation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 at 0.

Then, when a big hit occurs and a special gaming state is reached, the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 can be aimed by right-handing. After the special gaming state based on the big hit, the specific gaming state is a high probability state. In this specific gaming state, the probability of a winning result in the special figure variation display game is a high probability state that is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of any of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

Furthermore, in a specific gaming state, the probability that the hit result of the normal map variation display game (normal figure probability) is a high probability (normal figure high probability state) higher than 0 which is the normal probability (normal figure low probability state). It becomes a state. As a result, control is performed so that the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is longer than when the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal low probability state. Here, in the normal variation winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal probability is set to 0 so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal gaming state.

Also, in the short time state, the execution time of the normal map change display game (the normal map change time) is, for example, 500 milliseconds, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game is, for example, 6
When the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is released due to a win-winning game with a normal-game fluctuation display game as the winning result, the opening time of the first per-stop symbol (open time of the normal train) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500)
msec × 1), second per stop symbol opening time (general power opening time) and number of opening times (for example, 17
00 ms x 2 times), 3rd stop symbol opening time (general power opening time) and number of opening times (for example,
1700 msec × 3 times).

In addition, the execution time of the general map variable display game, the general map stop time, the number of general power releases, and the general power open time are appropriately set so as to control the normal map variable display game and the normal variable winning device 37 to be in the short-time operation state. For example, in the short-time state, the execution time (
It is possible to control so that the normal fluctuation time becomes a second fluctuation time shorter than the first fluctuation time (for example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the short time state, it is possible to control the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 milliseconds). 704 ms). Also, in the short-time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal-variation display game being won, the opening time (general power open time) is set to the normal state (low-probability state) It is possible to control so that the second opening time is longer than one opening time (for example, 100 ms is 1).
352 ms). Further, in the short-time state, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 (number of times of normal power release) is set to the first number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game.
It is possible to set the number of times of the second opening more frequently (for example, 4 times). Also, in the short-time state, the probability that the hit result of the normal-variable display game (normal-probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal low-probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operation state. Probability (usually high probability state, eg 250/251) is possible.

In the short time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of times of normal power release, the time of normal power release, and the probability of normal time. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

FIG. 12 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. CPU section 110, input section 120 having an input port, output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., CPU section 110, data bus 140 connecting between input section 120 and output section 130, etc. .

The CPU 110 is a gaming microcomputer (IC) called an amusement chip (IC).
(CPU) 111 and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that includes an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator and generates a clock that serves as a reference for a CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 include DC32V, DC12V, D generated by the power supply device 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level such as C5V is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 generates an AC-DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply.
A normal power supply unit 410 having a DC converter or a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V or DC5V from a DC32V voltage, and a RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 are supplied with a power supply voltage during a power failure. Backup power supply unit 420 to supply
And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to reduce costs by removing it from the object of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power source is a game microcomputer 11 of the game control device 100.
1 (particularly the built-in RAM), and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is turned off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, processing for forcibly initializing information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 Is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
Read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B and read / write RA
M (random access memory) 111C is provided.

The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as ROM 111B or RAM 11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

In addition, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the contents of the effects, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. In addition, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as the second half fluctuation group table and the second half fluctuation pattern selection table), and the fluctuation before reaching the reach state. Tables for determining the first half variation pattern as a pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the gaming machine. 10 overall control. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, a fluctuation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game (
Random number generation for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining the reach of variable display games (including the execution time of variable display games in various reach and variable display without reach) And a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

In addition, the CPU 111A determines that the ROM 111B
One of the variation pattern tables is acquired from the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (winning (
(Big hit or small hit) or off), the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current gaming state, the normal variation winning device 3 as the current gaming state
7 is selected and acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the operation state 7 (time-short operation state (normal power support state)), the number of start memories, and the like. Here, when executing the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby Control to make it pay out. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning port 36, and a normal variation winning device 37.
Start opening 2 switch 37a, start opening 3 switch 97a in the second start winning opening 97, gate switch 34a in the normal start gate 34, winning opening switch 35a, and first special variable winning apparatus 38 Switch 38a, lower special prize opening switch 39 of the second special variable winning device 39
a. Connected to an out switch 98 that detects all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been launched into the game area 32 and finished the game, and the high level supplied from these switches is 1
An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided that receives a negative logic signal such as 1V and a low level of 7V and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. Proximity I / F12
1, because the input range is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut off and becomes floating Such an abnormal state can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Proximity I / F1
21 output signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, start port 2 switch 37a, start port 3 switch 97a, gate switch 34a, winning port switch 35a, upper large winning port switch 38a and lower large winning port switch 39a are detected signals. Input to the second input port 123. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62, the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected, and the detection signal of the out switch 98 are input to the third input port 124. Is done. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal from the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 are also input. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration is provided in the gaming machine, and the detection signal is transmitted to the third input port 12.
4 may be input.

Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is the main board 10.
It is also supplied from 0 to a test firing test apparatus (not shown) via the relay substrate 70.
Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37 are output.
a, The detection signal of the start port 3 switch 97a is input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

The data held in the second input port 123 is stored in the enable signal CE by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123.
It can be read out by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

The input unit 120 also includes a fraud radio signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output when the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detects radio waves), a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be received), a payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shot ball cut switch signal (a signal indicating a lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the data bus 140 and supplies the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RESET is sent to the ports 122, 123,
124 is not supplied. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. However, immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal output from the proximity I / F 121, such as a start port switch, that is not required to be processed is supplied to the test test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied to the test firing test apparatus as they are, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. The port on the relay board 70 is connected to the gaming microcomputer 11.
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the trial test apparatus.

The output unit 130 includes a solenoid (upper large prize opening solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 for opening the first special variable winning device 38, and a solenoid (lower large winning opening) for opening the second special variable winning device 39. Solenoid) 39b and a second output port 134 for outputting opening / closing data of a solenoid (general power solenoid) 37c for opening the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 is provided. In addition, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. 4th output port 13 for outputting the ON / OFF data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected
6 is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 has a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information (one jackpot signal, two jackpot signals, three jackpot signals and four jackpot signals) to the external information terminal board 71. Is provided. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, the Schmitt buffer 13 is connected to the fifth output port 137.
2 is also output to the payout control apparatus 200 via 2. That is, the game control device 1
00 serves as an output means for outputting information to the outside of the gaming machine.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the upper prize winning solenoid 38b, the lower prize winning solenoid 39b, and the power solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. Output from the first driver (drive circuit) 138a, the second driver 138b, which outputs the segment line on / off drive signal on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the fourth output port 136 Third driver 1 for outputting an on / off drive signal for a digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50
38c, a fourth driver 138d for outputting an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71 is provided.

The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic driving method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12 V, and extracting the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so as to be lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 450. Photocoupler 13
9 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 450 through serial communication. Note that such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal included in the gaming microcomputer 111 in the same manner as a normal general-purpose microprocessor, and thus ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Although not particularly limited, the start port 1 switch 36 a in the first start winning prize port 36, the start port 2 switch 37 a in the normal variation winning device 37, and the start port 3 in the second start winning prize port 97. The switch 97a, the winning opening switch 35a, the upper large winning opening switch 38a, the lower large winning opening switch 39a, and the out switch 98 have a coil for magnetic detection, and use a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal comes close to the coil. Non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (
Hereinafter, the proximity switch is used. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 and the like include a micro switch having a mechanical contact. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The production control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111.
And a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing for video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A tone generator LSI 314 that controls the output of sound in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.
It has.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. An FeRAM 323 that can be held is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation and instructs the contents of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, lights the decoration lamp, motors And control of solenoid drive control and production time management.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 also has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30.
C, a synchronization signal STS for giving data transmission timing is input. VDP 312
To the main control microcomputer 311, a wait time for notifying the status of waiting for the reception of commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the interrupt signals INT0 to n in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. The interrupt signal INT is sent from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
Is entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An ornamental special figure holding number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via this command I / F 331 are produced as a production control command signal (production command ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
Operates at DC 5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V. Therefore, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls the board decoration device 46 and the information display device 630 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the glass frame 15, and provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). The board production device 44
A board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that a frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor that operates an effect device) is provided on the glass frame 15, and a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls the frame effect device is provided. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25 a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. A function of detecting the on / off state of the production actor switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting the detection and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311;
A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration.
In order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled thereby, DC 32V for driving a motor or solenoid, a display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, DC 12V for driving a motor or LED, DC5 that is the power supply voltage of the command I / F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15 V voltage for driving a motor, LED, and speaker. Furthermore, 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311
When using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as DC3.3V based on DC5V
And a DC-DC converter for generating DC 1.2 V are provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. The VDP 312 (VDRESET signal) and the sound source LSI 314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
These are supplied to an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, etc., and these are reset. In addition, the production control device 300 includes a cooling FA for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10.
The cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state where N45 is connected and the effect control device 300 is powered on.

In these control circuits, the start port 1 switch 36 provided in the first start winning award port 36.
Based on the input of the game ball detection signal from a, the jackpot determination random number value of the special figure 1 variable display game is extracted and the first start memory is stored in the RAM 111C. The random number value for determining the big hit in the first start-up memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of determining the hit or variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed. Further, the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and the start port 3 switch 97a provided in the second start prize port 97.
Based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from, a random number for determining the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game is extracted and the second start memory is stored in the RAM 111C. The random number value for determining the big hit in the second start-up memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a hit or variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is performed.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 sends a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game to the effect control device 30.
Output to 0. Then, on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, an identification symbol (identification information) is displayed.
Is displayed for a predetermined time, and then a process for displaying a special figure variation display game to be stopped is performed. In other words, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the variable display game is based on winning in the start winning area (first start winning port 36, normal variation winning device 37, second start winning port 97) of game balls flowing down the game area 32. It constitutes a game control means for controlling the progress.

In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying a decoration special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game.
Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, and also displays the special game. Performs processing to generate a state. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111A, for example, can open the opening / closing member 38c of the first special variable prize winning device 38 by the top big prize opening solenoid 38b and allow the game ball to flow into the top big prize opening. Control. Alternatively, the opening / closing member 3 of the second special variable winning device 39 is provided by the lower large winning port solenoid 39b.
9c is opened, and control is performed to allow the game ball to flow into the lower prize winning opening.

Then, the special winning opening is opened until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls wins the special winning opening or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening. Opening is defined as one round, and control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeat) this for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a specific game state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This specific game state is a high-probability state and a short-time state (a general electric power support state). Only one of the high probability state and the short time state may be generated, or none may be generated (low probability state and no short time state).

Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 and timer interruption processing shown in FIG. 18 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 14, first, a stack pointer which is a start address of an area in which a value of a register or the like is saved when an interrupt occurs after a process for prohibiting an interrupt (step X1) is performed. Stack pointer setting processing (step X2
)I do. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of this embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, and the upper order is 00.
h or 01h is taken, and in step X4, the first 00h is set. Next, a firing stop signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step X5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step X6),
Processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step X7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

In addition, the power-on delay timer is counted using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122,
By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the waiting time, the initialization switch 11
2 operations can be detected reliably. That is, when the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to continue doing. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps X8 to X12) is performed.
First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to check is set (step X8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (Step X9).

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step X8 (step X10). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (Step X10;
N) returns to the determination (step X9) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step X10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, it waits for the power to the gaming machine to be cut off. in this way,
By determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal has been received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the power outage due to noise, etc., and to properly deal with problems at power-on. .

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X9; N), that is, if a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by −1 (step X11), and the timer value is 0 Is determined (step X12). If the timer value is not 0 (step X
12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step X8). If the timer value is 0 (step X
12; Y), that is, when the waiting time has ended, access to a readable / writable RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step X13), and off data is output to all output ports (output) (Step X14).

Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used in this embodiment for communication with the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step X15) and read first. Whether the initialization switch has been turned on is determined from the state of the first input port 122 (step X16).

When the initialization switch is OFF (Step X16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (Step X17). If so (step X17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X).
18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step X19).
It is determined whether or not the calculated checksum matches the checksum at power-off (step X2
0). If the checksums match (step X20; Y), step X21 in FIG.
The process is performed when normal recovery from a power failure occurs.

Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step X16; Y),
When it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X17
N or step X18; N), checksum is not normal (step X20; N)
Is determined, the process proceeds to step X23 in FIG. 15 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

In step X21 in FIG. 15, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (
Step X21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. Note that the busy signal flag area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 is ready to accept a command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Undefined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined.

Thereafter, a power failure recovery command corresponding to the special figure status prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X22). Proceed to X28. In this embodiment, in step X22, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, and a screen designation command are transmitted. As for the screen designation command, if both special figure 1 and special figure 2 are in normal processing, which will be described later, that is, if the special figure variation display game is neither being executed nor being in a special game state, the customer is waiting. Send a waiting demo screen command, otherwise send a recovery screen command. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

On the other hand, when jumping from step X16, X17, X18, X20 to step X23, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permitted (step X23), and all the areas including the busy signal flag area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step X24), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step X2).
5). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X2).
6). The region to be initialized here is a region relating to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration region and the production mode. Then, the RAM initialization command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X27), and the process proceeds to step X28. In this embodiment, step X27
Then, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (display a customer waiting demo screen, and light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).
A plurality of commands such as a command for notifying AM initialization) are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

In step X28, a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator)
Performs processing to start the circuit. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step X28, a process for setting the activation of the random number generation circuit is performed (step X29). Specifically, the CPU 111 sets a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit.
Done by A. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. Bit transposition pattern is the replacement method when the extracted random bit arrangement (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

After that, a predetermined register in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on (soft random number registers 1 to n)
RWM as the initial value (start value) of the corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers for determining the hit symbol of the special figure (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number)) After saving in the area (step X30), the interruption is permitted (step X31). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register is changed every time the power is turned on. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain an illegal random number.

Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step X32) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated by a random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU. CTC output with the same cycle (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) for timer interrupt processing)
It is a “low speed counter” that is updated based on the above. The big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number employ a so-called “initial value changing method” in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round. Each random number may be a counter update by +1 or −1, or may be a random update in which all values within the range appear without overlapping until one round is reached. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step X32, the number of times the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and data bus (for example, twice)
Is set (step X33), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X3).
4). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X34; N), the initial value random number update process (
Return to step X32). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step X32) (step X31), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed with priority, and the timer interrupt Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

Note that the initial value random number update process in step X32 includes a method of performing an initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. In the timer interrupt process, the initial value random number update process is not performed, and if it is only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process,
This has the advantage that the main process is simplified.

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X34; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step X33 (step X35).
. If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step X3
5; N) returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X34). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step X35; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step X36).
), Processing for outputting off data to all output ports (step X37).

Thereafter, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X38).
), The power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X39).
Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X40) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step X41), the RW
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step X42), it waits for the power of the gaming machine to be cut off. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shut down is properly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

The main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit, The operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 16 shows the checksum calculation process (steps X19 and X4 in the main process described above).
0). In this checksum calculation process, first, as the start value of the calculated address, RW
Set the start address of M (Step X51) and set the number of repetitions (Step X52)
Then, “0” is set as the calculated value (step X53). RA used for repeat count
The number of M bytes is set.

Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step X5
4) The calculation address is updated by +1 (step X55), the repetition number is updated by -1 (step X56), and it is determined whether the checksum calculation is completed (step X57). If the calculation has not been completed (step X57: N), the process returns to step X54 and the above processing is repeated. If the calculation is completed (step X57: Y), the checksum calculation process is ended.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 17 shows the initial value random number update process (step X32) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step X61), the small hit symbol initial value random number 1 is updated by +1 (step X62), and the initial value random number update process is terminated. Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the “small hit symbol initial value random number” is the special figure fluctuation display game. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the small hit stop symbol. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, an interrupt routine started at a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and FIG.
Timer interrupt processing starts.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step X1).
01). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register saving process in which a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) is transferred to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X102). At Step X102, the same processing as Step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing (step X103) is performed to input from various sensors and switches and to acquire signals, that is, to read the state of each input port. Then, output processing (step X104) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (upper large winning opening solenoid 38b and lower large winning opening solenoid 39b) is performed based on output data set in various processes. In addition, when a signal for stopping firing is output in step X5 in the main process, a signal for permitting firing is output by performing this output process, and the launch permitting signal can be set to a permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating a launch permission state viewed from the game control device, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating a launch permission state viewed from the payout control device is also a payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch controller. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, a payout command transmission process (step X105) for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control apparatus 200, a random number update process 1 (step X106),
Random number update processing 2 (step X107) is performed. Thereafter, whether or not there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port 3 switch 97a, the winning port switch 35a, the upper large winning port switch 38a, and the lower large winning port switch 39a. A winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X108) is performed for monitoring and error monitoring (whether the front frame or the glass frame is not opened).

Next, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 37a
A start-port switch monitoring process (step X109) is performed to monitor the winnings. In the start port switch monitoring process, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted based on the winning of game balls to the first start winning port 36, the normal variation winning device 37, and the second starting winning port 97. And the special figure 1 game process (step X110) which performs the process regarding a special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and the special figure 2 game process (step X111) which performs the process regarding a special figure 2 fluctuation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step X112) that is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED that displays special information variation display games and various information related to the game to display desired contents, and a magnetic sensor 61. Magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113) that performs processing to check whether there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from the board, and board fraud that performs processing to check the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is any abnormality Monitoring process (Step X1
14). Further, external information editing processing (step X115) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the base is determined based on the number of game balls detected by the out switch 98 and the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area. A state display edit output process for performing a value calculation process and the like is performed (step X116), and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

Here, in the present embodiment, the process for restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process for allowing the interrupt) and the process for restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process for designating the register bank 0) Automatically at the time of the timer interrupt processing. Depending on the CPU used, there is a gaming machine that needs to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step X103) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 19, in the input processing, first, the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step X121).
). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the bit state is cleared (step X122), and the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S122). X123).

Next, the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step X1
24) The address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step X125).
Then, after preparing unused bit data (step X126), bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X127), and a switch reading process (step X128) is performed.

Thereafter, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step X
129), the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step X130).
Then, after preparing the unused bit data (step X131), the bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X132), the switch reading process (step X133) is performed,
The input process is terminated.

In this embodiment, “preparation” means setting a value in a register, but is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory. In addition, as information about the unused bit data and the bit data to be inverted, information prepared for each input port is used.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps X128 and X133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step X141). And 8
If there is an unused bit in the bit port, the bit state is cleared (step X1
42) After inverting the bits that need to be inverted (step X143), they are saved (stored) in the port input state 1 of the target switch control area (step X144). Thereafter, the process waits for the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading to elapse (step X145).

When the delay time (0.1 ms) elapses, a second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step X146). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step X147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step X148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area (Save) (step X149). After that, a definite bit pattern in which the same bit is 1 and the different bit is 0 in the first and second reading is created (step X150),
The logical product of the fixed bit pattern and the port input state 2 is calculated and used as the final determined bit (step X151).

Next, an unconfirmed bit pattern is created in which the same bit in the first and second reads is set to 0, and a different bit is set to 1 (step X152). The product is taken and used as the previous held bit (step X153). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the current fixed bit and the previous held bit are combined and saved as the current finalized state (step X154), the exclusive OR of the previous and current finalized state is taken and saved as the rising edge (step X155), The switch reading process ends.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt processing, and the signal changes by comparing the result with the previous reading. There is a method for determining whether or not the switch has been made. However, if the switch state read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, the correct determination may not be made. On the other hand, as described in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid the above problems by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step X104) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 21, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the port 135 (see FIG. 12) for outputting the segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (step X161). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs the data of the upper large winning opening solenoid 38b and the lower large winning opening solenoid 39b is synthesized and output (step X162).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step X163), and the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is updated.
Digit line output data is acquired (step X164), and the acquired information and external information data are combined (step X165). Then, the combined data is output to the digit output port 136 and the external information output port 137 (step X166). Thereafter, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step X167), and the loaded data is sent to the segment output port 135.
(Step X168).

Subsequently, the data to be output to the external information terminal board 71 is loaded and synthesized (step X169).
Then, the synthesized data and the output data for permission to fire are synthesized (step X170), and the synthesized data is output to the external information output port 137 (step X171). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step X172). Thereafter, the data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step X173).

Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step X174). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the relay board 7
The synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on 0 (step X175). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step X176) and the output process is terminated. That is, the game control device 100
However, it constitutes an output means for outputting information to the outside of the gaming machine.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step X105) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step X181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command.

The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of winning balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). The winning data corresponding to the winning ball which is the area to be used and for which the main winning ball signal generation processing is not performed is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 serves as a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information related to the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control apparatus 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By comparing these two signals,
It is possible to monitor unauthorized payments.

Each of these winning number counter areas is provided with a winning number counter area for each of the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (for example, three winning balls, ten winning balls, and 14 winning balls). Accordingly, 1 is added to the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area based on the winning at the winning opening. That is, information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. Note that a larger area than the winning number counter area 2 is assigned to the winning number counter area 1 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main award ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, whereas the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.

In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step X181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number. If there is no count number (step X181: N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X182), and it is determined whether the checking of the counting numbers of all the winning number counter areas is completed. (Step X183). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step X183; Y), the process proceeds to step X192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step X183; N), step X1
Returning to 81, the above process is repeated.

If it is determined in step X181 that there is a count number (step X181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step X18).
4) The number of payouts corresponding to the target winning number counter area is acquired (step X185). Then, the value of the remaining prize ball area and the acquired payout number are added to obtain a new prize ball remaining number (step X1
86) and save in the award ball remaining number area (step X187). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before this processing, a fraction that does not satisfy a predetermined number that is a reference for output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

After that, 10 is subtracted from the addition result, which is a predetermined number serving as a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal (
Step X188), it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (Step X189). When the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step X189; N), the process proceeds to step X192. In this case, the result of the subtraction is not saved in the prize ball remaining area, so the value before the subtraction is stored in the prize ball remaining area. When the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189; Y)
Updates the value of the main prize ball signal output count area by +1 (step X190), saves the subtraction result in the prize ball remaining area (step X191), and returns to step X188.

As a result, the main winning ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as a result of winning a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . In addition, by outputting the main prize ball signal, when game balls are paid out during a big hit, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed with the payout of game balls. It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.

In step X192, if the payout command transmission timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X192), and it is determined whether or not the payout command transmission timer is 0 (step X193).
If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (step X193; N), the payout command transmission process is terminated. If the payout command transmission timer is 0 (step X193; Y
) Determines whether or not the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control. When the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not a payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal is a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control. The payout busy signal flag is information in which whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal is set in an idle state in which payout control can be started immediately, payout Either a busy state in which control cannot be started immediately or an undefined state in which the state is undefined is set.

The indefinite state is set, for example, by clearing the busy signal flag area in the process at power-on. This indeterminate state means that an idle state or a busy state is set based on the state of the payout busy signal being maintained for a predetermined period of time indicating that the payout control can be started immediately or cannot be executed. To eliminate. That is, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, a prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control device 200. A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the fact that a state signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

If the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. In this case, it is determined that the busy state is also in an indefinite state. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start payout control and does not transmit a payout command, it is possible to perform useless processing by not performing subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. To prevent and reduce the burden of control.

If the payout busy signal flag is not busy (step X194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step X195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step X195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number.

If there is no count number in the winning number counter area to be checked (step X195; N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X196), and all the winning number counter areas are updated. It is determined whether the count number has been checked (step X197). With this determination, all checks are completed (step X19
7; If it is determined as Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step X197; N), the process returns to step X195 and the above processing is repeated.

If it is determined in step X195 that there is a count number in the winning number counter area to be checked (step X195; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step X198), a payout command corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 1 is acquired (step X199). Then, the acquired command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step X200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step X201), and the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and has an initial value of, for example, 200 ms.
Is set.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one win in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 performs control for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control can start payout control. A prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means.

As described above, the game control device 100 performs control to transmit the award ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the award is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute payout control. A ball command will be sent. As a result, data corresponding to a winning that has not yet been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and is backed up to the payout control device 200. Even if it does not have the function to do, accurate payout control can be realized.

In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, since conventional gaming machines require a function for backup,
There was a problem that led to an increase in cost. According to the present invention, accurate payout control can be realized without providing the payout control apparatus 200 with a function for backing up.

Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Also, since the prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information relating to the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

From the above, the game control is performed in an integrated manner, and a prize area provided in the game area 32 (first start prize port 36, normal variation prize winning device 37, second start prize prize port 97, general prize prize port 35).
, A game control means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of a game ball to the first special variation winning device 38, the second special variation winning device 39), and the game control means. A payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing payout control of game balls based on a prize ball command, and the game control means can start payout control by the payout control means output from the payout control means Based on the status signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not, a control to send a prize ball command to the payout control means is performed, and when a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure, the payout control means starts payout control. Even if a status signal indicating that it is possible is output, the status signal indicating that the payout control unit can start payout control without sending a prize ball command immediately to the payout control unit for a predetermined period of time. Continue The winning balls instruction in response to that output and thus that is to be sent to the payout control means.

In addition, the game area 32 includes different prize areas (first start prize opening 36, normal variation prize winning device 37, second start prize winning opening 97, general prize winning opening 35, first special variable prize winning device 38, second special prize winning device 38, second special prize winning device 38, second special prize winning device 38, second special prize winning device 38, second special prize winning device 38). A plurality of variable prize-winning devices 39) are provided, and the game control means (game control device 100) is capable of specifying for each prize ball number whether or not a prize ball command for instructing payout control of game balls has not been transmitted. (Game control device 100), the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, and when there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, a prize ball command is issued to the payout control means ( Whether or not there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter is used to determine whether or not the status signal can start the payout control. To be done before the identification of .

In addition to performing game control in an integrated manner, a predetermined winning area (first start winning port 36, normal variation winning device 37, second starting winning port 97, general winning port 35, first special variable winning device 38,
Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of a game ball to the second special variable prize winning device 39), and a game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means A payout control means (payout control apparatus 200) for performing the payout control, and the game control means has a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. When it is shown that the payout control can be started, a prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) for sending a prize ball command to the payout control means, and payout with the winning of a game ball to a predetermined prize area External information output means (game control device 100) for outputting a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including information on the number of prize balls determined to be outside the gaming machine, and the external information output means is a payout Output from control means State signal is the payout control means is that it has to perform output without winning balls signals related to whether or not it is possible to start the dispensing control.

In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives a prize ball command even when a power failure occurs and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started when the power failure is restored. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and a prize ball command is issued in response to a state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started for a predetermined period of time. This means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information relating to a prize ball command and a prize capable of storing information relating to a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100), and a prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) includes a predetermined winning area (first start winning port 36, normal variation winning device 37,
A winning ball command is generated in units of one winning in the second starting winning port 97, the general winning port 35, the first special variable winning device 38, and the second special variable winning device 39), and the status signal can start payout control. The prize ball command counter (game control device 100) is configured to transmit a single prize ball command to the payout control means (payout control device 200). The information of the winning can be stored in units of one winning, and is updated when a game ball is won in a predetermined winning area, and is updated in response to transmission of a winning ball command to the payout control means Thus, the number of prize ball commands that have not been transmitted can be stored, and the external information output means accumulates the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of game balls in a predetermined prize area, and the accumulated value is Every time a predetermined number is reached, a prize ball signal is sent out of the gaming machine. The winning ball signal counter is capable of storing information on the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area and is updated when a game ball is won in the predetermined winning area. At the same time, the number of prize balls that have not yet been accumulated can be stored by updating in correspondence with the number of prize balls accumulated by the external information output means.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 23 shows random number update processing 1 (step X1) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 18).
06). The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number that are the targets of the initial value random number update process. In this random number update process 1, it is first determined whether or not the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X221).

If the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224).
When the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; Y), the big hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X222), and the next initial value of the loaded big hit symbol random number is handled. Set to a register (start value setting register) that holds a start value of a random number counter (random number area) to be executed (step X223). Thereafter, it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224).

If the small hit design random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X224; N), the random number update processing 1 is terminated. In addition, when the small hit design random number is waiting for initial value setting (step X224)
Y) is a register for loading the start value of the random number counter (random number area) corresponding to the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number as a next initial value (step X225). (Start value setting register) is set (step X226), and random number update processing 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 24 shows the random number update process 2 (step X1) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18).
07). The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variation pattern random number 1) as the variation pattern random numbers. Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (reach variation mode determining random number) by the random number update processing 2 executed in one interrupt processing with respect to the main processing is the top 1
It is configured to be executed for either the byte or the lower one byte.

In this random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is the target of the current update process is updated (step X231). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step X232). Then, the random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step X233). The table to be referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

Subsequently, for example, the value of the M1 counter provided in the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment is loaded (step X234). By using the value of the M1 counter, randomness can be given to the random number. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step X235). Note that the mask value is a bit number that varies depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated. When the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236). When the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236; Y), the remaining value by masking the value of the M1 counter with the upper 1 byte as a mask value as the addition value (hereinafter referred to as this) (Referred to as masked value)
1 ”is added to the mask update value, and the lower 1 byte is set to“ 0 ”(step X2
37), the process proceeds to Step X239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” as the addition value, and the lower 1
The byte is set to the mask update value (step X238), and the process proceeds to step X239.
Note that adding “1” to the masked value may result in the masked value being “0”.
If “0” is added later, the value does not change from the value before the addition.

Then, it is determined whether the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step X239). If it is a 2-byte random number (step X239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step X240). The process proceeds to step X242. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step X239; N), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1 byte) as the lower 1 byte of the random value. ) (Step X2
41), go to Step X242.

In step X242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step X237 or X238 to the random value is set as a new random value, and it is determined whether this new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step X233 (step X243). If the new random value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step X243; N), the new random value is saved in the random number area below the 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step X245). If the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random value is set as a new new random value (step X244). Byte random number or 2
Save in the random number area below the byte random number (step X245).

Next, it is determined whether or not the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step X246). If it is a 2-byte random number (step X246; Y), a new random number value (or a value when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the random number area above the 2-byte random number (step X247). )
Then, the random number update process 2 is finished.

In this way, the CPU 111A updates the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. Therefore, the CPU 111 </ b> A changes the variation mode of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game balls to the first start winning award 36, the normal variation winning device 37, and the second starting winning award 97. Random number updating means for updating a variation pattern random number for determining (variation pattern).

[Prize mouth switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 25 shows a winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step X107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). In this winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one upper large winning opening switch 38a in the upper large winning opening (first special variable winning apparatus 38) is prepared (step X301). The illegal & winning monitoring process (step X302) for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening even though the big winning opening is not open and detecting a normal winning is executed.

The winning mouth monitoring table (illegal monitoring table) includes a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input to the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of the illegal winning number area, and an illegal winning error. Information of a notification command, an illegal winning number upper limit (number of fraud occurrence determination), an address of a winning mouth switch table, and notification timer update information (permission / update) is defined. The winning opening switch table defines information on the number of monitoring repetitions (the number of switches), monitoring switch bits, the winning counter area 1 address, and the winning counter area 2 address. These fraud monitoring tables and winning tables are prepared according to each switch to be monitored.

Thereafter, the other lower major prize opening switch 39 in the lower major prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39).
A winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to a is prepared (step X303), and an illegal & winning monitoring process (step X304) for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning and detecting a normal winning is executed. Next, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning switch (starting port 2 switch 37a) in the ordinary electric power system is prepared (step X305), and an illegal & winning monitoring process for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning and detecting a normal winning. (Step X306) is executed.

And, a winning opening switch that can always win (start port 1 switch 36a, starting port 3 here)
A winning opening monitoring table of the switch 97a and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) is prepared (step X307), and a winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number (step X308).
)I do. Next, a status scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals whose status is to be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (step X309). This state scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3.
Thereafter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step X310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step X311) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, when the state scan counter value is 0, the state monitoring based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like can be performed. When the value of the state scan counter is set to 1, monitoring of the state based on the chute ball break switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, state monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, state monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set.

Next, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step X312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step X313) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the state scan counter value is 0, state monitoring based on a signal output from the glass frame open detection switch is set, and state scanning is performed. When the value of the counter is 1, the state monitoring based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, the state monitoring based on the frame radio wave improper signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, the state monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (step X314). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (step X314; N), the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is 0 (step X314; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step X315), and a gaming machine state check is performed to determine whether an error has occurred or not. Processing (step X316) is performed.

By referring to the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 for the status scan counter value, when the status scan counter value is 0, status monitoring based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the connector of the switch or the like can be performed. Is set. The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is not defined when the state scan counter is 1 to 3.

Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step X317) for setting a busy signal flag based on a payout busy signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can start payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is ended. To do. Steps X315 to X317
This process is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, so that the process is executed once every four timer interrupts. That is, when the timer interruption is performed every 4 ms, the processing from step X315 to X317 is performed every 16 ms.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 26 shows the fraud & winning monitoring process (steps X302, X304, X306) in the above-described winning opening switch / status monitoring process. This fraud & prize winning monitoring process is performed by each of the two upper big prize opening switches 38a of the first special variable prize winning device 38, the lower big prize opening switch 39a of the second special variable prize winning device 39, and the start opening of the normal variable prize winning device 37. 2 is a process performed for the switch 37a. In these cases, since it is easy to perform an illegal act of forcibly opening the opening / closing member, inserting a game ball, and paying out a winning ball, illegal monitoring is performed in addition to winning detection.

In this fraud & winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step X321) to determine whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step X321).
Step X322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened when the error monitoring target winning port switch is the upper large winning port switch 38a. When the switch is the lower large prize opening switch 39a, it is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the second special variable prize winning device 39 is opened. Further, when the winning port switch to be monitored for error is the start port 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 is being executed based on the normal hit.

If it is the fraud monitoring period (step X322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target prize-winning switch (step X323). If there is no input to the target prize opening switch (step X323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X3).
32). Further, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X323; Y), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (step X324), and the number of illegal winnings after the addition is the number of fraud determinations to be monitored (for example, It is determined whether or not (5) has been exceeded (step X325).

The number of judgments is set to 5, for example, when a winning opening in the open state is converted to a closed state, the game ball is sandwiched between the opening and closing members of the winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the validity period of the winning opening switch. This is because when a prize is won or when noise is added to the signal, it is not determined to be illegal, and it is not illegal but is not easily determined as an error.

If the number of determinations has not been exceeded (step X325; N), a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step X330). When the number of determinations is exceeded (step X325; Y), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the number of fraud determinations (step X32).
6) An initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target illegal prize notification timer area (
Step X327). Next, a target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step X328), a fraud winning flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step X329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340). ).

On the other hand, if it is not the fraud monitoring period (step X322; N), a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step X330), and a winning number counter updating process (step X331) for setting a winning ball is performed. . Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332), and whether or not the notification timer is permitted to be updated is determined (step X333). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step X333; N), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the notification timer is permitted to be updated (step X333; Y), if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X334). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

The notification timer is updated by checking that the prize winning switch for error monitoring is one of the upper prize winning switch 3
If it is 8a, it is permitted, and if the prize port switch subject to error monitoring is the other upper prize port switch 38a, it is not permitted. As a result, the notification timer is updated twice with respect to fraudulent notification about the first special variable winning device 38, and a prescribed time (for example, 6
It is prevented that the time is up in half of (0000 ms). Note that when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the lower large winning port switch 39a or the start port 2 switch 37a, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step X335). If the value is not 0 (step X335; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step X335; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, a target fraud cancel command is prepared (step X336), and an illegal win cancel flag is set as the fraud flag. Prepare (Step X337)
). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338).
.

When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & prize monitoring process, the number of illegal winnings of interest is cleared ( Step X339), comparing the prepared illegal flag with the value of the target illegal flag area (
Step X340). In addition, when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X3
38; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340).

When the prepared illegal flag matches the value of the target illegal flag area (step X
340; Y) ends the fraud & prize winning monitoring process. If the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area do not match (step X340; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step X341), and an effect command setting process is performed. (
Step X342), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is canceled, so that the start and end of error notification are set. Will be.

[Winner counter update process]
FIG. 27 shows the winning number counter updating process (steps X308 and X331) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process and fraud & winning monitoring process. In this winning number counter updating process, first, the number of winning port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning port switch table of the winning port monitoring table (step X351), and input to the target winning port switch (more precisely, the change in input). ) Is determined (step X352).

If there is no input (step X352: N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X368), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step X369). If there is an input (step X352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step X353), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X354), and it is determined whether an overflow occurs (step X354). Step X355). If no overflow has occurred (step X355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step X356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X356).
Step X357). When an overflow occurs (step X355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357).

After the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X358), and it is determined whether or not it overflows (step X35).
9). If an overflow occurs (Step X359; Y), Step X
361. If no overflow has occurred (step X359; N
) Saves the updated value in the winning number counter area 2 (step X360),
361.

In step X361, the value of the total winning number counter area for counting the total number of game balls won in each winning opening is loaded (step X361), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X362), and it is determined whether it overflows. (Step X363). If no overflow has occurred (step X363; N), the updated value is saved in the total winning number counter area (step X364). As a result, the game balls won in each winning opening are counted and the counting result is held. That is, the game control device 100 is a winning detection sensor (start port 1 switch 36a, start port 2 switch 37a, start port 3 switch 97a, upper large winning port switch 38a, lower large winning port switch 39a, winning port switch 35a). A total winning number counter for counting the number of detections is formed. Thereafter, a difference calculation process for calculating a difference necessary for determining the out number error is performed (step X365), and the process proceeds to step X368.

Although the details of the difference calculation process and the error based on the difference will be described later, the number of game balls detected at each winning opening is an out switch 98 that detects all the game balls that have been launched into the game area 32 and finished the game. This is a process of calculating the number exceeding the number of detected game balls as a difference. When this difference exceeds a predetermined number, an out number error occurs.

On the other hand, if an overflow occurs (step X363; Y), the value of the difference counter area is saved in the total winning number counter area (step X366), and 0 is stored in the out counter area.
Is saved (step X367), and the process proceeds to step X368. The difference counter area is an area for storing the above-described difference value, and the out counter area is an area for storing the number of game balls detected by the out switch 98. When the value of the total winning number counter area overflows, the values of the total winning number counter area and the out counter area are set as described above. In addition,
The value of the difference counter area is maintained. Thus, there is no inconvenience in detecting the out number error.

Thereafter, the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X368).
Then, it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches has been completed (step X369). If all the switches have not been monitored (step X369; N), the process returns to the process (step X352) for determining whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch. Also, when monitoring of all switches is completed (
Step X369; Y) ends the winning number counter updating process. With the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 and the total winning number counter area are updated based on winning in the winning area, and the winning information is stored.

[Direction command setting processing]
FIG. 28 shows the effect command setting process (step X342) in the above-described fraud & prize winning monitoring process.
)showed that. The effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in the other processes executed during the timer interrupt process. In the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step X371).
Then, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer is full (step X372).

If the transmission buffer is full (step X372; Y), the process returns to step X371. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X372; N), the command data (
MODE (upper byte)) is written to the production serial transmission buffer (step X373).
) Read the status of the serial transmission buffer (step X374) and determine whether the transmission buffer is full (step X375).

If the transmission buffer is full (step X375; Y), the process returns to step X374. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X375; N), the command data (
Write ACTION (low-order byte) to the serial transmission buffer for production (step X3
76) The effect command setting process is terminated.

Thus, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game control device 100 and make it difficult to analyze the command. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, it is not necessary to take in a command in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Game machine status check processing]
In FIG. 29, the gaming machine state check process (in the above-described prize opening switch / state monitoring process
Steps X311, X313, X316) are shown. In this gaming machine state check process,
First, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is acquired (step X451).
Then, it is determined whether the signal to be monitored is on (step X452).

Information corresponding to the state scan counter is defined in the state monitoring table. This information includes, for example, the lower address of the start address of the status monitoring area, the lower address of the port input status area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only the bits of the target signal, and the signal ON judgment data, status off command (in case of error system, error notification end command), status on command (in case of error system, error notification start command), status off monitoring timer comparison value, status on monitoring timer A comparison value is included.

If the target signal is not on (step X452: N), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step X453), and a target state off command is acquired and prepared (step X454). After that, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X4
55) The value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step X459).
The case where the target signal is not on (step X452: N) is a state indicating that the error signal is not an error (normal), and that the signal from the touch switch indicates that the signal is not touched. is there.

On the other hand, if the target signal is on (step X452: Y), a state on flag is prepared as a state flag (step X456), and a target state on command is acquired and prepared (step X457). Thereafter, a target state on-monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X458), and the value of the target signal control region is compared with the current signal state (step X45).
9). When the target signal is on (step X452: Y), this is a state indicating that an error signal is an error (abnormal or illegal), and that the signal from the touch switch is touched. It is the state which shows.

When the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the current signal (step X459; Y)
That is, if the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (
Step X462), it is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (Step X463). If the value of the target signal control area does not match the current signal state (step X459; N), that is, if the signal state changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area ( Step X460). Then, the target state monitoring timer is cleared (step X461), the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X462), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value ( Step X463).

When the value of the target state monitoring timer is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463; N
) Ends the gaming machine state check process. If the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463: Y), the state monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of comparison value -1 (step X464). The status flag is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step X465).

When the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (step X465; Y), the gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (step X465; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step X466), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step X467), and the gaming machine state check process is terminated. Thereby, the state off command prepared in step X454 or the state on command prepared in X457 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 30 shows the payout busy signal check process (step X317) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this payout busy signal check process,
It is determined whether the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step X471). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start payout control.

If the payout busy signal is not on (step X471; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step X472), and an off-confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 3)
2 ms) is set (step X473). When the payout busy signal is on (step X471; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step X4).
74), an on-determined monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step X475).
.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the busy signal state region is the same as the state of the current signal, that is, whether or not there has been a change of on and off (step X476). The busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X479). Also,
If they are not the same (step X476; N), the current signal state is saved in the busy signal state area (step X477), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (step X47).
8) The busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X479).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is larger than the previously set ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value or the OFF confirmation monitoring timer comparison value, that is, the signal confirmation time (for example, 32 ms) has been reached (step) X480). If the signal confirmation time has not been reached (step X4
80; N) ends the payout busy signal check process. When the signal determination time is reached (step X480; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by −1, and the previously set ON determination monitoring timer comparison value or OFF determination monitoring timer comparison value is −1. (Step X4
81) The prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step X48).
2) The payout busy signal check process is terminated.

By this processing, a busy signal flag is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time,
Even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal flag is not changed immediately, but the busy signal flag is changed when the changed state continues over the signal confirmation time, and the influence of noise etc. It is difficult to receive.

In addition, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and is in an indefinite state until one of the signal states continues for the signal determination time. Thus, when a power failure occurs and the power supply recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued. In response to the fact that a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period of time, a prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200. Will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, the start port switch monitoring process in the above-described timer interrupt process (step X109)
Details will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, a start port 1 (first start winning port 36) winning monitor table is prepared (step X485), and a hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X486). Then, it is determined whether or not there is information on a start opening winning set that is set when a big hit random number is acquired based on winning in the first start winning opening 36 in the hard random number acquisition process (step X487).

If the information on the presence of the start opening prize is not set based on the winning at the first start winning opening 36 (step X487; N), the process proceeds to step X494. In this case, no start opening information is set. On the other hand, if the information on the start opening winning is set based on the winning to the first starting winning opening 36 (step X487; Y), it is determined whether the probability is high (step X488). And when it is in high probability (step X488; Y), it transfers to step X490. If the probability is not high (step X488; N), it is determined whether the jackpot is being hit (during a special gaming state based on the jackpot) (step X489).

And when it is not in big hit (step X489; N), it transfers to step X490. On the other hand, if it is a big hit (step X489; Y), the process proceeds to step X492.
In step X490, a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X490), and an effect command setting process is performed (step X491). Thereafter, a table for setting information on hold by the start port 1 is prepared (step X492), and a special drawing start port switch common process is performed (step X493).

Next, a start opening 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) winning monitor table is prepared (step X49).
4) A hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X495), and it is determined whether or not there is information on a start opening winning set that is set when a big hit random number is acquired based on winning to the normal variation winning device 37 (step X496).

When the information on the presence of a start opening prize is not set based on winning in the normal variable winning device 37 (
Step X496; N) shifts to Step X501. In this case, no start opening information is set. On the other hand, when the start opening winning presence information is set based on the winning to the normal variation winning device 37 (step X496; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary varying winning device 37) is in operation, that is, It is determined whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (step X497). When the ordinary electric accessory is operating (step X497; Y), The process proceeds to step X499. On the other hand, when the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step X497; N), it is determined whether or not a normal electric fraud has occurred (step X498).

In step X498, it is determined that fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud determination number (for example, 5). Normally variable prize winning device 37 is
Game balls cannot be won in the closed state, and game balls can be won only in the open state. Therefore,
If the game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred. If there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. Then, when the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

When it is determined in step X498 that the power transmission fraud is occurring (step X498; Y
) Proceeds to Step X501. Also, if it is determined that the ordinary electric power fraud has not occurred (step X498; N), a table for setting the hold information by the second starting port (ordinary variable prize winning device 37) is prepared (step X499), and the special figure is started. Mouth switch common processing (Step X5
00), the process proceeds to step X501.

Next, a winning opening monitoring table is prepared for the starting port 3 (second starting winning port 97) (step X501).
), A hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X502). Then, it is determined whether or not there is information on a start opening winning set that is set when a big hit random number is acquired based on winning in the second start winning opening 97 in the hard random number acquisition process (step X503).

When the information on the presence of the start opening prize is not set based on the winning at the second start winning opening 97 (step X503; N), the start opening switch monitoring process is terminated. In this case, no start opening information is set. On the other hand, when the information on the presence of the start opening winning is set based on the winning to the second start winning opening 97 (step X503; Y), it is determined whether the probability is high (step X504). And when it is in high probability (step X504; Y), it transfers to step X508. If the probability is not high (step X504; N), it is determined whether the jackpot is being hit (in the special gaming state based on the jackpot) (step X505).

If it is not a big hit (step X505; N), the process proceeds to step X506. If it is a big hit (step X505; Y), the process proceeds to step X508.
In step X506, a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X506), and an effect command setting process is performed (step X507). Thereafter, a table for setting information on hold by the start port 3 is prepared (step X508), a special drawing start port switch common process is performed (step X509), and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the right-handed instruction notification command transmitted in step X490 or X506, the right-handed instruction notification for instructing the player to make a right-handed strike is made by display or voice. . When the player is in a high probability state, the time is shortened. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to make a right-hand hit that can win the normal variation winning device 37. Even during the special gaming state, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special winning device 38 is advantageous. It is more advantageous for the player to make a right-handed winning in the variable winning device 39. Therefore, when a winning is detected in the high probability state at the first starting winning port 36 or the second starting winning port 97 which is not left-winned, a right-handed instruction notification is performed. In the special game state based on the small hit, since the possibility of winning is low, the right-handed notification may not be performed but may be performed. Further, in the case of a special game state based on 2R probability variation jackpot, the right-handed notification may not be performed because the possibility of winning is low. Further, when the ending is in the special gaming state, the right-handed notification may not be performed.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
FIG. 32 shows the hard random number acquisition process (step X
486, X495, X502). In this hard random number acquisition process, first, start opening no winning information is set (step X511), and it is determined whether there is an input to the target switch (step X511).
Step X512).

If there is no input to the target switch (step X512; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. When there is an input to the target switch (step X512; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step X513), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514).

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. When there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514; Y), the big hit random number extracted in the target hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step X515). Then, the start opening winning presence information is set (step X516), and the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, details of the special-purpose start port switch common process (steps X493, X500, and X509) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the special figure start port switch common process, first, the start port 1 switch 36 is used.
a, the start port signal output which is the number of times information regarding the number of winnings to the monitored start port switch among the start port 2 switch 37a and the start port 3 switch 97a is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The number of times is loaded (step X521), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522), and it is determined whether the output number overflows (step X523).
).

If the output count does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is set to RW.
The start-up port signal output count area of M is saved (step X524), and the process proceeds to step X525. On the other hand, when the output count overflows (step X523; Y),
The process proceeds to step X525. In the present embodiment, “0” is displayed in the start port signal output frequency area.
To “255” can be stored. When the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” by +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows, so that it is not saved.

Next, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a
Among them, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure holding (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the starter switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value (step X525). When the number of special figure hold to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step X525; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step X525; Y), update the number of special figure reservations to be updated (number of special figure 1 or number 2) (+1) ( Step X526), a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the monitoring target start opening switch and the special figure hold number is prepared (step X527), and a production command setting process (step X528) is performed, and the target start opening prize flag is set. Is saved (step X529).

Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored and the number of special figure hold is calculated (step X530), and the big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition processing in steps X486, X495, and X502 is calculated as RWM. Are saved in the big hit random number storage area (step X531). Next, a big hit symbol random number of the starter switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step X532), and saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X533).
.

Next, the variation pattern random numbers (in the present embodiment, variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3) are saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step X534). Then, a small hit symbol random number is extracted, prepared (step X535), and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X536). After that, special figure hold information determination process (a prefetch process)
Step X537) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the start winning area of the first start winning port 36, the second start winning port 97, and the normal variable winning device 37. A start storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as start storage that is the right to execute the variable display game is provided. In addition, the start storage means (game control device 100) is a first random number value extracted based on the winning of a game ball to the first start winning opening 36 which is the starting opening of FIG. 2nd start with a predetermined number as the upper limit of various random numbers extracted based on the winning of game balls to the second start winning opening 97 which is the starting opening of FIG. Memorize as memory.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
FIG. 34 shows the special figure hold information determination process (step X537) in the special figure start port switch common process described above. The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetching process for determining the result related information corresponding to the special figure start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the special figure start memory. In the special figure hold information determination process, first, a big hit determination process is performed to determine whether the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not (step X543). If the determination result is a big hit (step X544; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table is set (step X545), and stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number is acquired (step X546). A pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step X544; N), a small hit determination process is performed to determine whether the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not.
Step X547). If the determination result is a small hit (step X548; Y), stop symbol information for small hit is set (step X549), and a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551). If the determination result is not a small hit (step X548; N), the stop symbol information for the outage is set (step X550), and a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

After preparing a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information (step X551),
An effect command setting process is performed (step X552). Next, special figure information setting processing (step X553) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern, is performed.
Special figure fluctuation pattern setting processing for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed (step X554).

Then, a prefetch variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number representing the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step X555), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step X556), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step X553 and the special figure fluctuation pattern setting process in step X554 are special figure 1 special process 1 special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 normal process special figure 2 fluctuation start process. This is the same as the process executed at the start of the variable display game.

Through the above processing, the prefetch stop pattern command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the special figure start memory, and the prefetch variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the special figure start memory. Is prepared and transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information (whether big hit or small hit or the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the special figure start memory is displayed on the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding special figure start memory. The effect control device 300 can be notified before the start timing, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, before the start timing of the special figure variation display game. It is possible to notify the player of the result related information.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (
For example, it is determined whether or not a special result is obtained. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
FIG. 35 shows a special figure 1 game process (step X110) in the timer interrupt process described above.
showed that. Special figure 1 game processing controls the entire process related to special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 1
Set the display of. In the special figure 1 game process, first, during the special game state that is executed based on whether the special figure 2 big hit / small hit is in effect, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit or small hit. Is determined (step Y101).

If the special figure 2 is not in big hit / small hit (step Y101; N), a big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y102), and if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y103). ). Further, when the big hit / small hit in the special figure 2 is in progress (step Y1
01; Y) proceeds to step Y103.

In the big prize opening switch monitoring process, the game balls of the upper big prize opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable prize winning device 38 and the lower big prize port switch 39a provided in the second special variable prize winning device 39 are played. A process for monitoring detection is performed. In the special figure 1 game processing, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for a special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. For the special game state executed based on the game result being a big hit or a small hit, a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 2 game process described later.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). If the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y119, and the subsequent processing is performed. Further, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the process branches to the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to is set in the register (step Y105). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired using the table (step Y106), and a subroutine call is made with the special figure 1 game process number (step Y107).

If the special figure 1 game process number is “0” in step Y107, the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the effect setting, FIG.
Special figure 1 routine processing for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuation (step Y108)
I do. When the special figure 1 game process number is “1” in step Y107, the special figure for setting the stop display time of special figure 1 and setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display process is shown. One fluctuation processing (step Y109) is performed.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command setting corresponding to the type of the big hit, Special figure 1 display processing (for setting fanfare time according to the winning prize opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing fanfare / interval processing, etc.)
Step Y110) is performed.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “3”, setting of the opening time of the big winning opening, updating of the number of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening, etc. The fanfare / interval processing (step Y111) to be performed is performed. If the special figure 1 game process number is “4” in step Y107, an interval command is set if the big hit round is not the final round, while an ending command is set if the final round is a final round, A special winning opening opening process (step Y112) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game process number is “5”, if the big hit round is the final round, a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening,
Special figure 1 A big winning opening remaining ball process (step Y113) for setting information necessary for the big hit end process is performed. In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game process number is "6", special figure 1 big hit end process (step Y114) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 normal process (step Y108). I do.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "7", to set the opening time / opening pattern of the big prize opening when the small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the small hitting process. Small hitting fanfare process (step Y1)
15) is performed. In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “8”, a small hitting process (step Y116) for setting an ending command, setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, and the like is performed. Do.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “9”, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls won in the big winning opening during the small hitting process, The small hit remaining ball processing (step Y117) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
If the special figure 1 game process number is “10” in step Y107, special figure 1 small hit end processing (step Y118) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal process is performed.

After that, a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (
Step Y119), the symbol variation control process (step Y120) related to the special figure 1 indicator 51 is performed, and the special figure 1 game process is terminated. This special figure 1 game process performs a series of execution control related to the first fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game).

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
FIG. 36 shows special game 2 game processing (step X111) in the timer interrupt processing described above.
showed that. In the special figure 2 game process, the whole process related to the special figure 2 variable display game is controlled and the display of the special figure 2 is set. The special figure 2 game process basically performs the same process as the special figure 1 game process described above for the special figure 2.

In this special figure 2 game process, first, during the special game state which is executed based on whether the special figure 1 big hit / small hit is in effect, that is, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit or small hit. Is determined (step Y131). Then, when the big hit / small hit in the special figure 1 is not in progress (step Y131; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y13).
2) If the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y133). Further, when the big hit / small hit shown in FIG. 1 is in progress (step Y131; Y), step Y133
Migrate to

In the big prize opening switch monitoring process, the game balls of the upper big prize opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable prize winning device 38 and the lower big prize port switch 39a provided in the second special variable prize winning device 39 are played. A process for monitoring detection is performed. In the special figure 2 game process, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. For the special game state executed based on the game result being a big hit or a small hit, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-described special figure 1 game process.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134). If the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y134; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step Y152 to perform the subsequent processing. Further, when the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the process branches to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number. The special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to is set in the register (step Y136). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is obtained using the table (step Y137), and a subroutine call is made with the special figure 2 game process number (step Y138).

If the special figure 2 game process number is “0” at step Y138, the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the effect setting, FIG.
Special figure 2 normal processing for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuation (step Y139)
I do. When the special figure 2 game process number is “1” in step Y138, the special figure for setting the stop display time of special figure 2, setting of information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display process, etc. 2. Processing during fluctuation (step Y140) is performed.

In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game process number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the big hit type, Special figure 2 display processing (for setting fanfare time according to the winning prize opening pattern, setting information necessary to perform fanfare / interval processing, etc.)
Step Y141) is performed.

If the special figure 2 game process number is “3” in step Y138, setting of the opening time of the big prize opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the big prize opening, etc. The fanfare / interval processing (step Y142) to be performed is performed. If the special figure 2 game process number is “4” in step Y138, an interval command is set if the big win round is not the final round, while an ending command is set if it is the final round, A special winning opening opening process (step Y143) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game process number is “5”, if the big hit round is the final round, a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening,
Special figure 2 A big winning opening remaining ball process (step Y144) for setting information necessary for the big hit end process is performed. If the special figure 2 game process number is “6” in step Y138, the special figure 2 big hit end process (step Y145) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal process (step Y139) is performed. I do.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game process number is “7”, to set the opening time / opening pattern of the big winning opening when the small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the mid-small process Small hitting fanfare process (step Y1)
46). If the special figure 2 game process number is “8” at step Y138, the small hitting process (step Y147) for setting the ending command, setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process, and the like is performed. Do.

If the special figure 2 game process number is “9” in step Y138, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls won in the big winning opening during the small hitting process, A small hit remaining sphere process (step Y148) for setting information necessary for the process is performed.
If the special figure 2 game process number is “10” in step Y138, special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y149) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 ordinary process is performed.

After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (
Step Y152), the symbol variation control process (step Y153) related to the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed, and the special figure 2 game process is terminated. This special figure 2 game process performs a series of execution control related to the second fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game). The above special figure 2 game process basically performs the same process as the above special figure 1 game process for special figure 2, and in the following description, the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. The corresponding processing will be described in parallel.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
FIG. 37 shows the special winning opening switch monitoring process (steps Y102 and Y132) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the upper special winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is being opened (step Y161). If the upper prize winning opening is open (step Y161; Y), the process proceeds to step Y166. Further, when the upper university winning opening is not open (step Y161;
N) determines whether or not the remaining ball processing of the top prize winning mouth is being performed (step Y162). Note that the remaining ball processing in this determination includes both the big winning opening remaining ball processing based on the big hit and the small hit remaining ball processing based on the small hit.

When the remaining ball processing of the top prize winning opening is being performed (step Y162; Y), step Y166 is performed.
Migrate to In addition, when the remaining ball of the upper prize winning gate is not being processed (step Y162; N),
It is determined whether or not the lower university winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is being opened (step Y16).
3). When the lower prize winning opening is not being opened (step Y163; N), the big winning prize switch monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the lower university winning opening is being opened (step Y163;
Y) determines whether or not there is an input to the lower large prize opening switch (step Y164).

It should be noted that during the opening in steps Y161 and Y163, the special game state based on the first special result (big hit), the special game state based on the first special game state, and the second special result (small hit). Including both being released in the second special gaming state. Step Y1
61 to Y163 may be determined with reference to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 game process number, or a flag indicating whether each state is set or not. You may make it determine based on.

If there is no input to the lower prize winning opening switch (step Y164; N), the big winning prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when there is an input to the lower prize winning switch (step Y164;
In Y), 1 is set in a winning counter for counting the number of winnings to the big winning opening added in the current big winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y165), and the process proceeds to step Y175.

On the other hand, in the step Y166 which shifts to the case where the upper prize winning opening is being opened (step Y161; Y) or the remaining ball processing of the upper prize winning opening is being executed (step Y162; Y),
0 is set in the winning counter (step Y166). After that, the upper prize winning switch 1
On the other hand, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper prize winning opening switch 38a) (step Y167). If there is no input (step Y167; N), the process proceeds to step Y171.

When there is an input to the upper prize winning switch 1 (step Y167; Y), a prize winning count command is prepared (step Y168), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y169). In the case of the first special variable winning device 38, a big winning mouth count command is transmitted in order to produce an effect by winning. In addition, the winning counter is updated by +1 (
Step Y170), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper prize winning switch 2 (the other upper prize winning switch 38a) (step Y171).

If there is no input to the upper prize winning switch 2 (step Y171; N), the process proceeds to step Y175. In addition, when there is an input to the upper prize winning switch 2 (step Y17)
1; Y) prepares a winning prize count command (step Y172) and performs an effect command setting process (step Y173). Further, the winning counter is updated by 1 (step Y
174), the process proceeds to step Y175.

Thereafter, when the value of the winning counter is 0 (step Y175; Y), when the large winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (step Y176; Y), or when the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed (step Y177; Y). If it is any of the above, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Also,
The value of the winning counter is not 0 (step Y175; N), and the winning ball remaining ball processing is not in progress (
In step Y176; N), if the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step Y177; N), the value of the winning counter is added to the winning prize count (step Y178), and the winning prize count is the upper limit (one). It is determined whether or not the number of game balls that can be won in the round of () is greater than or equal to (step Y179).

When the number of winning prizes is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (9 here) (step Y17)
9; N) ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process. Further, when the number of the big winning mouth count becomes equal to or greater than the upper limit (step Y179; Y), the number of the big winning mouth count is kept at the upper limit (step Y180), and the target special figure game processing timer area is cleared to zero. (Step Y181
). Then, it is determined whether the game is being released in the big hit, that is, in the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on the big hit (step Y182).

When the big hit is not being released (step Y182; N), that is, when the big hit is being opened, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Also, when the big hit is being released (step Y182; Y), the big hit opening operation end value is saved in the big winning opening control pointer area (step Y183), and the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. This closes the grand prize opening and ends one round.

It should be noted that even when there is an input to the lower prize winning switch (step Y164; Y), the prize winning count command may be transmitted to the effect control device 300. Also, if there is a remaining ball process for the lower major prize opening, a special prize count command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 even if there is an input to the lower major prize opening switch during the remaining ball process. Anyway.

[Special Figure 1 Normal Processing]
FIG. 38 shows the special figure 1 routine process (step Y108) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can be changed (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 in this determination can start fluctuation is that it is not from the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game that is a big hit or the small hit to the end of the special gaming state. In addition, while the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed or during the special game state based on the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation cannot be started, but in this case, the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. Here, this need not be determined.

When the special figure 1 is not ready to be changed (step Y201; N), the special figure 1 routine process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y217), and the special figure 1 routine process is terminated. Further, when the special figure 1 can start changing (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handed instruction notification has been completed, that is, whether the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y202). If the left hand instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), step Y
206. If the left hand instruction is not notified (step Y202; N),
A left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), and an effect command setting process is performed (
Step Y204). Thereafter, the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y205),
It is determined whether or not the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (step Y206). Left-handed instruction notification flag
It is cleared when the special figure variation display game that was last played in a specific gaming state that is in a high probability state is finished, so that it is left-handed when shifting to a normal gaming state that is in a low probability state Instruction notification will be performed.

If the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (step Y206; Y), step Y217 is performed.
Migrate to If the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (step Y206; N), a variation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y208). Thereafter, a special figure 1 fluctuation start process for setting information related to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y209), and a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step Y210). Then, an effect command setting process is performed (step Y211). In addition, the process of preparing the decoration special figure hold number command (step Y21
0) is not subtracted from the special figure 1 hold number based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the hold corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number minus -1 from the current special figure 1 hold number A few commands are being prepared.

Next, the special figure status area is set (information added) during special figure 1 fluctuation (step Y21).
2). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure fluctuation display game, and is 0-5.
Is set. The special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed, the special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed, Special figure status 2 shows a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. Further, special figure status 3 shows a state in which both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are executed, and special figure status 4 is a first special gaming state which is a special gaming state based on a big hit. The special figure status 5 indicates the second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on the small hit. Here, since the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

Next, it is determined whether the high probability state is being reached (step Y213). And when it is in a high probability state (step Y213; Y), it transfers to step Y216. If not in the high probability state (step Y213; N), it is determined whether the high probability final variation is in progress (step Y214). High probability final variation means that the special figure variation display game is being executed (including the stop time) for a predetermined number of times (here, the 50th time) since the end of the first special gaming state. The last special figure change display game that has been executed is being executed.

When the high-probability final change is being performed (step Y214; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. If the high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step Y214; N), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y215). That is, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started in a low probability state, the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set. After that, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process is performed (step Y216), and the special figure 1 routine process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Regular Processing]
FIG. 39 shows the special figure 2 ordinary process (step Y139) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 ordinary process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start to change (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 in this determination can start fluctuation is that it is not from the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game that is a big hit or the small hit until the end of the special gaming state. It should be noted that even during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game or during the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game, the fluctuation cannot be started, but in this case, the special figure 2 normal processing is not executed. Here, this need not be determined.

When the special figure 2 cannot be changed (step Y221; N), the special figure 2 ordinary process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y237), and the special figure 2 ordinary process is terminated. Further, when the special figure 2 can be changed (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 holding number is 0 (step Y222).

If the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (step Y222; N), a change start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y224). After that, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing for setting information related to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y225), and a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared (step Y226). Then, an effect command setting process is performed (step Y227). In addition, at the time of performing the process (step Y226) for preparing the decoration special figure hold number command, the subtraction of the special figure 2 hold number based on the start of the special figure 2 variable display game is not performed.
A hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number minus -1 from the current special figure 2 hold number is prepared.

Next, the special figure status area is set (information addition) during special figure 2 fluctuation (step Y22).
8). Since the special figure 2 variable display game is started here, the special figure status is 2 or 3
Is set. Then, it is determined whether the state is in a high probability state (step Y229). If the state is in a high probability state (step Y229; Y), the process proceeds to step Y232. If not in the high probability state (step Y229; N), it is determined whether the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step Y230). High probability final variation means that the special figure variation display game is being executed (including the stop time) for a predetermined number of times (here, the 50th time) since the end of the first special gaming state. The last special figure change display game that has been executed is being executed.

When the high-probability final change is being performed (step Y230; Y), the process proceeds to step Y232. If the high probability final variation is not being performed (step Y230; N), the special figure 2 variation check flag is set (step Y231). That is, the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started in a low probability state. Thereafter, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process is performed (step Y232), and the special figure 2 ordinary process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (step Y233). If the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (step Y233; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is changing (step Y234). If the special figure 1 is not changing (step Y234; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step Y235). If not disclosed (step Y235; N), the customer waiting state is set. Performs processing related to settings. Also, if the special figure 1 holding number is not 0 (step Y23)
3; N), if the special figure 1 is changing (step Y234; Y) or if the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step Y235; Y), the process proceeds to step Y239.

In the process for setting the customer waiting state, first, a customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step Y236), and a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y237). Command setting processing is performed (step Y238), and the process proceeds to step Y239. By setting the customer waiting demo command to correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens depending on the probability state.

In addition, when the production control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the production control device 300 that does not have a backup function loses game state information, so that it is impossible to perform an appropriate production. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to produce an effect according to the gaming state from the reception of this command, and to transmit the probability information command based on the change of the gaming state. It becomes possible to return to the production according to the gaming state earlier than waiting.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be executed simultaneously, and the probability state may be changed by the processing for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. Therefore, a variation start probability information command is transmitted every time the special figure variation display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). Thereby, the production control device 30
At 0, it is possible to perform an appropriate performance according to the gaming state.

In addition, since the variation start probability information command is transmitted each time the special figure variation display game is started, even when the production control device 300 is restarted, the production according to the gaming state is performed from the reception of this command. It is possible to return to the effect corresponding to the gaming state earlier than waiting for the probability information command based on the change of the gaming state to be transmitted. In addition, you may make it include other information for returning to the production | presentation according to a game state, when the production | presentation control apparatus 300 restarts in a customer waiting demo command or a change start probability information command.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
In FIG. 40, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y209) in the special figure 1 normal process described above.
showed that. This special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. First, a special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y241), and the result information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is out of place information. The big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y242) for setting the big hit information or the small hit information is performed.

Next, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information)
243), a special figure information setting process (step Y244) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed, and various information relating to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game A special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referencing is set, is prepared (step Y245).

Thereafter, a special figure fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting information on the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. (Step Y247) is performed. Through these processes,
The result and variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed are determined. after that,
A process of updating the number of high-probability fluctuations for managing the period of the high-probability state is performed (step Y2
48), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
In FIG. 41, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step Y225) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 usual process.
showed that. This special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. First, a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y261), and the result information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is out of place information. The big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y262) for setting the big hit information or the small hit information is performed.

Next, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y) related to the setting of the special symbol 2 stop symbol (symbol information)
263), a special figure information setting process (step Y264) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern is performed (step Y264), and various information relating to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game A special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referencing is set, is prepared (step Y265).

After that, a special figure fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y266) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. (Step Y267) is performed. Through these processes,
The result and variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed are determined. after that,
A process of updating the number of high-probability fluctuations for managing the period of the high-probability state is performed (step Y2
68) The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 42 shows the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step Y in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above).
242). In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y271), and deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y272). Next, a big hit random number is loaded and prepared from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) (step Y273), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to zero. Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 2 as a result of the big hit determination of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is a big hit (step Y275), and if it is a big hit (step Y275; Y
) Proceeds to step Y279. In other words, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed simultaneously are prevented from being a big hit. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y275; N), a big hit determination process (step Y276) is performed to determine whether or not the acquired big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.

If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is a big hit (step Y277; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y272 (step Y278). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is not a big hit (step Y277; N), whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value is a small hit. A small hit determination process (step Y279) is performed to determine whether or not.

If the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y 279) is a small hit (step Y 280; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y 271 and saved. (Step Y281), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is not the small hit (step Y280; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 43 shows the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step Y in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process).
262). In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step Y293), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area is cleared to zero. Note that for the number of reservations 1 is an area for storing information (random number or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 as a result of the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is a big hit (step Y295), and if it is a big hit (step Y295; Y
) Proceeds to Step Y299. In other words, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed simultaneously are prevented from being a big hit. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed for determining whether or not the acquired big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.

If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is a big hit (step Y297; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the lost information is saved in step Y292 (step Y298). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is not a big hit (step Y297; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value. A small hit determination process (step Y299) is performed.

If the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten on the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y291 and saved. (Step Y301), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (step Y300; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 44 shows the big hit determination process (steps Y276 and Y296) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process described above. In this big hit determination process,
A lower limit determination value for the big hit determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

If the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; Y), that is, if it is not a big hit, the judgment result is set to be off (step Y317), and the big hit determination processing is terminated. Note that the loss as a result of the determination indicates that the lottery is lost. If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312)
N) determines whether the state is a high probability state (step Y313).

If it is in a high probability state (step Y313; Y), an upper limit determination value with high probability is set (step Y314), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316). ). If not in the high probability state (step Y313; N), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set (step Y315), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316). .

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316; Y), that is, if it is not a big hit, the judgment result is set to be off (step Y317), and the big hit determination process is terminated. Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316).
N), that is, in the case of a big hit, a big hit is set as a determination result (step Y31).
8) The big hit determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 45 shows the small hit determination process (steps Y279 and Y299) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process described above. In this small hit determination process,
It is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). Note that “small hit” means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value and not more than the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Further, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value do not overlap.

When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; Y),
In other words, if it is not a small hit, a gap is set as the determination result (step Y326), and the small hit determination process is terminated. In addition, the loss as the determination result indicates that the lottery is lost. Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the special figure 1 information is being set, that is, whether the special figure 1 variable display game is being determined. (Step Y322).

If the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y322; Y), the small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 1 is set (step Y323), and the value of the target big hit random number is the small hit upper limit determination value. It is determined whether it is larger (step Y325). In addition, when information of special figure 1 is not being set (
Step Y322; N), that is, if it is a determination about the special figure 2 variable display game,
A small hitting upper limit determination value for special figure 2 is set (step Y324), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hitting upper limit determination value (step Y325).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325; Y), that is, when it is not the small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y326), and the small hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step Y327), and the small hit determination process is terminated. To do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
46 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above.
243). In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, it is first determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331). If the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1 is determined.
A jackpot symbol random number is loaded from the jackpot symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (step Y3).
32). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step Y333), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol saving area (
Step Y334). The big hit type is selected by this processing. Note that the special figure 1 variable display game stop symbol is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area when a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result is forcibly changed to the result.

After that, the special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y335), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern area (
Step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure indicator (here, special figure 1 indicator 51).
This is for setting a stop symbol on the display device 41 and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area (step Y337), and the big prize opening release information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired. Special Figure 1
Save in the special winning opening information area (step Y338). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

On the other hand, if it is not big hit (step Y331; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y339), and if it is a small hit (step Y339; Y), the special figure 1 small hit symbol. Load a small hit symbol random number from the random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) (step Y
340). Next, a special symbol 1 small hit symbol table is set (step Y341), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol saving area (step Y342). The small hit type is selected by this processing. Thereafter, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y343), and a decorative special symbol 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y).
346).

If the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y339; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol save area (step Y344), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stopped in the special symbol 1 stop. The design pattern area is saved (step Y345), and a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

Thereafter, the decoration special figure 1 command is saved in the decoration special figure 1 command area (step Y347).
), Production command setting processing (step Y348) is performed. This decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y349), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y350). The small symbol symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y351), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
47 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above).
263). In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is performed on the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361).
361; Y) loads the jackpot symbol random number from the special symbol 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (step Y362). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step Y
363), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol save area (step Y364). The big hit type is selected by this processing.
Note that the special symbol 2 variable display game stop symbol is saved not in the special graphic 2 stop symbol area but in the special graphic 2 stop symbol save area when a special result is derived in the special graphic 1 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result is forcibly changed to the result.

Thereafter, a special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y365), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern area (
Step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure indicator (here, special figure 2 indicator 52).
This is for setting a stop symbol on the display device 41 and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area (step Y367), and the big prize opening release information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired. Special figure 2
Save in the special winning opening information area (step Y368). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

On the other hand, if it is not big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y369). If it is a small hit (step Y369; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol Load a small hit symbol random number from the random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) (step Y
370). Next, a special symbol 2 small hit symbol table is set (step Y371), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol save area (step Y372). The small hit type is selected by this processing. Thereafter, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y373), and a decorative special symbol 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y).
376).

If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y369; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol saving area (step Y374), and the stop symbol pattern is stopped for the special symbol 2 stop. The design pattern area is saved (step Y375), and a special decoration figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

Thereafter, the decoration special figure 2 command is saved in the decoration special figure 2 command area (step Y377).
), An effect command setting process (step Y378) is performed. This decoration special figure 2 command is transmitted to the production control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y379), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y380). The 2 small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y381), and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure information setting process]
FIG. 48 shows the special figure information setting process (steps Y244 and Y264) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. This special figure information setting process is special figure 1 and special figure 2
In the special figure 1 change start process, the special figure 1 is the target special figure, and in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, the special figure 2 is the target special figure. Do.

In this special figure information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a high probability (step Y401).
. When the probability is not high (step Y401; N), the low probability variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y402), and first half offset data and second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the target special figure are acquired. (Step Y403), it is determined whether the target special figure is a big hit, that is, whether the stop symbol pattern of the target special figure is a big hit stop symbol pattern (Step Y404).

If the target special figure is a big hit (step Y404; Y), the process proceeds to step Y412. If the target special figure is not a big hit (step Y404; N), it is determined whether the target special figure is a small hit, that is, whether the stop symbol pattern of the target special figure is a small hit stop symbol pattern (step Y405). If the target special figure is not a small hit (step Y4
05; N), that is, in the case of a deviation, the special figure reservation number is added to the first half offset data to convert the value (step Y407), and the process proceeds to step Y412. If the target special figure is a small hit (step Y405; Y), the process proceeds to step Y412.

On the other hand, when the probability is high (step Y401; Y), a high probability variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y408), and the first half offset data and second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the target special figure. Is acquired (step Y409), and the process proceeds to step Y412.

Then, the first half offset data set as described above is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y412), and the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y413) to set the special figure information. The process ends.

In other words, in the special game fluctuation display game in the normal gaming state, the fluctuation pattern is determined by considering the special figure hold number only for the first half fluctuation pattern in the case of losing, and the special figure hold number in the case of big hit or small hit The variation pattern is determined without consideration. Further, in the special figure variation display game in the specific gaming state, the variation pattern is determined without considering the special figure reservation number.

[Special figure variation pattern setting processing]
FIG. 49 shows the special figure fluctuation pattern setting process (steps Y246 and Y266) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. Note that the fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation that is a fluctuation aspect from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. The first half variation pattern is set after the latter half variation pattern is set first.

In the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process, first, a variation group selection address table is set (step Y451), and an address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y452). Then, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the holding number 1) of the target special figure and prepared (step Y453).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is deviated, that is, whether the stop symbol pattern is a deviant stop symbol pattern (step Y454). If the target special symbol is deviated (step Y454; Y)
Performs a 2-byte sorting process (step Y455), and proceeds to step Y457. If the target special figure is not out of step (step Y454; N), a sorting process is performed (step Y456), and the process proceeds to step Y457. When the result is a big hit or a small hit, the distribution value is 1 byte, but when the result is out of order, the distribution value is 2 bytes to enable a variety of effects.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is obtained and prepared (step Y457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for holding number 1) of the target special figure. To prepare (step Y458). Then, a sorting process (step Y459) is performed, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step Y460). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, a first half variation group table is set (step Y461), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the determined second half variation number (step Y462). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (
In step Y463), the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variable pattern random number 3 storage area of the target special figure (for holding number 1) and prepared (step Y464).

Thereafter, a sorting process (step Y465) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y467), and the special figure variation pattern setting process is terminated. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern for the whole period of the special figure variation display game started from now is set.

[2-byte sort processing]
FIG. 50 shows the 2-byte sorting process (step Y455) in the above-described special figure variation pattern setting process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the top data of the prepared second-half fluctuation group table (selection table) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (step Y501). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. Since there is no need for distribution in the variation group table, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

If the first data in the latter-half variation group table is a code without distribution (step Y502; Y), update the data address corresponding to the result of distribution (step Y502; Y)
Step Y507) The 2-byte sorting process ends. On the other hand, if the first data of the latter-half variation group table is not a code without distribution (step Y502; N), one distribution value first defined in the latter-half variation group table is acquired (step Y5).
03).

Next, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step Y373 from the loaded random value (the value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) (step Y504), and the calculated new random value Is smaller than “0” (step Y505). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step Y505; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step Y506), the process proceeds to step Y503 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do. That is, after the distribution value specified next in the variation group selection table is acquired in step Y503, the distribution value is subtracted with the random number determined in step Y505 as a new random value, and a new random value is further subtracted. A numerical value is calculated (step Y504). And
It is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y505).

In step Y505, the new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y505).
505; Y) is executed until it is determined. As a result, any one of the latter-half variation selection tables is selected from at least one latter-half variation selection table defined in the latter-half variation group table. If it is determined in step Y505 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y505; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the result of distribution (step Y507), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. Exit.

[Distribution processing]
FIG. 51 shows the distribution process (steps Y456, Y459, Y465) in the above-described special figure fluctuation pattern setting process and special figure fluctuation pattern setting process. Based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2, the distribution process selects the latter half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the latter half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group), or based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3,
This is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern group).

In this distribution process, first, the first data of the prepared latter half variation selection table (selection table) and the first half variation selection table (selection table) is assigned a code without distribution (ie, “
0 ") is checked (step Y511). Here, like the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern or first half fluctuation pattern. In the case of a selection table having no distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

If the first data in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code with no sorting (step Y512; Y), it is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result (step Y517), and the sorting is performed. The process ends. On the other hand, if the first data of the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is not a code without distribution (step Y512; N), one distribution value first defined in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table. Is acquired (step Y513).

Next, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in Step Y513 from the loaded random value (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 2 or the fluctuation pattern random number 3) (Step Y514), and then the calculation It is determined whether or not the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step Y515). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step Y515;
N) After updating to the address of the next distribution value (step Y516), the process proceeds to step Y513 and the subsequent processes are performed.

That is, in step Y513, after the distribution value specified next in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is acquired, the distribution value is subtracted with the random number value determined in step Y515 as a new random value. Further, a new random value is calculated (step Y514).
. Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y
515).

In step Y515, the new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y515).
515; Y) is executed until it is determined. As a result, any one of the latter-half variation number or the first-half variation number is selected from at least one latter-half variation pattern or first-half variation pattern defined in the latter-half variation selection table or the first-half variation selection table. And in step Y515,
If it is determined that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y515; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step Y517), and the distribution process ends.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 52 shows the change start information setting process (steps Y247 and Y267) in the above-described special figure 1 change start process and special figure 2 change start process. In this variation start information setting process, it is first determined whether or not the information of FIG. 1 is being set (step Y551). If the information of FIG. 1 is being set (step Y551; Y), The random number storage area (for the hold number 1) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step Y552). Further, when the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y551; N), that is, when the information of the special figure 2 is being set, the random number storage areas of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 of the special figure 2 are cleared (step). Y553).

Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step Y554), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step Y555). Further, the latter half variation time value table is set (step Y556), and the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number is acquired (step Y557). Then, the first-half variation time value and the latter-half variation time value are added (step Y558).
The added value is saved in the target special game process timer area (step Y559).

Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step Y564).
Then, a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step Y565), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y566). Next, the target special figure holding number is updated by −1 (step Y568), and the contents of the random number storage area of the target special figure are shifted (step Y569).
) Clear the free area after the shift (step Y570), and end the variation start information setting process.

Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is,
Based on the start-up memory stored in the start-up storage means, the game control device 100 can display a variable display game (
This is a determining means capable of determining the results and variation mode information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. Examples include variable commands that contain information about patterns. It should be noted that the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as first variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). Further, it can be said that the first variation display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the first variation display game from the entire special figure 1 game processing. Furthermore, the game control device 100 is configured to display the second variation display game (
The second variation display game execution control means capable of performing the execution control of the special figure 2 variation display game). Further, it can be said that the second variation display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the second variation display game from the entire special figure 2 game processing.

In addition, the game control device 100 determines that the result of the first variation display game, the variation mode information, and the second
Effect control means (effect control device 3) using the result of the change display game and the change mode information as control information
00). In addition, when the game control device 100 starts measuring the variation time in response to the start of the variation display game for each of the first variation display game and the second variation display game, and the variation time has elapsed, It serves as a measuring means for ending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game.

[High probability change count update processing]
FIG. 53 shows the high probability variation frequency update processing (steps Y248 and Y268) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this high probability variation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not a high probability is present (step Y581), and if not high probability (step Y581; N), the high probability variation number update process is terminated. Also, if there is a high probability (
In step Y581; Y), the number of times of high probability fluctuation managing the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game to be in a high probability state is updated by -1 (step Y582), and it is determined whether the number of times of high probability fluctuation is 0 ( Step Y583).

If the high probability variation number is not 0 (step Y583; N), that is, if the high probability state continues, the high probability variation number update process is terminated. When the number of high-probability fluctuations is 0 (step Y583; Y), that is, when the high-probability state is ended, signals related to the end of the high-probability state and the short-time state are saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). . Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is set to OFF.

Further, the low probability state and the number with no time saving are saved in the game state display number area (step Y586), and the special figure low probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y587). Then, the high probability final variation flag corresponding to the symbol to start variation is set (step Y588), the ordinary low probability flag is saved in the ordinary game mode flag area (step Y589), and the high probability variation number update process is performed. finish. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a specific game state generating means for generating a specific game state over a period until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed after the special game state ends. In addition, although the high probability state and the short time state are set as the specific game state, a state in which only one is generated may be used.

In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the high probability state is set until the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times after the special game state is finished, but the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display are performed. Since the game can be executed at the same time, the high-probability variation number update process for managing the number of high-probability states is performed at the start of the special figure variation display game. If it is a gaming machine that does not execute one special figure fluctuation display game while the other special figure fluctuation display game is being executed as in the prior art, the probability state is not changed until the predetermined special figure fluctuation display game is finished. There is no problem if you change to a low probability state. However, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed simultaneously as in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability state is set to a low probability at the end of the predetermined special figure variable display game. If the state is changed to the state, the determination is made with a high probability state even for the other special figure fluctuation display game started during the execution of the one special figure fluctuation display game, and the high probability over a predetermined number of times. The game can be executed in the state. Therefore, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed simultaneously as in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, one special figure variable display game which is the predetermined number of times is displayed in a high probability state. After the determination, it is necessary to be in a low probability state before the start of the other special figure variation display game. Here, immediately after the start processing for one special figure variation display game which is the predetermined number of times is finished. It is possible to change to a low probability state.

As described above, since the high probability variation number update process is performed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, the last special figure fluctuation display game in which the lottery is performed in the high probability state is changed. The display is already in a low probability state. Therefore, if other processing is performed with reference to the actual probability state during the variation display of the special figure variation display game, the processing is performed as a low probability state, which may cause inconvenience. is there. Therefore, the special probability variation display game is set with a high probability final variation flag so that it can be handled as a game executed as a high probability state. In addition, the high probability final variation flag is information that can determine whether the last special diagram variation display game in which the lottery is performed in the high probability state is a special diagram 1 variation display game or a special diagram 2 variation display game. Is included.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuating process transition setting process]
FIG. 54 shows a special process 1 changing process transition setting process (step Y21 in the special process of FIG. 1).
6) was shown. In the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 1 game process number (step Y601), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y602).

Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y603), and a signal relating to the fluctuation start in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y604). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to ON. Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y605), and the blinking control timer (see special figure 1) is displayed in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area.
An initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the timer of the blinking cycle of the display 51 is set (step Y606). Further, an initial value is set in the special symbol 1 changing symbol number area (step Y60).
7) The special process 1 changing process transition setting process is terminated.

The initial value set in the special symbol 1 changing symbol number area is 0, so that the variable display starts from the state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit when the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from a state where all the segments are turned off.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuating process transition setting process]
In FIG. 55, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process in the special figure 2 normal process (step Y23).
0). In this special figure 2 changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 2 game process number (step Y611), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y612).

Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y613), and a signal relating to the fluctuation start in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y614). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to ON. Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y615), and the blinking control timer (special figure 2 is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area).
An initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the flashing cycle timer of the display 52 is set (step Y616). Further, an initial value is set in the special symbol 2 changing symbol number area (step Y61).
7) The special process 2 changing process transition setting process is terminated.

The initial value to be set in the special symbol 2 changing symbol number area is 0, so that the variable display starts when all segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit when the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from a state where all the segments are turned off.

In addition, when starting the variable display in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, it is started from a state in which all the segments are turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable display may be started from a lighting mode different from the lighting mode of any result mode, and if there is a segment that is not used in any result mode, the variable display is started at least from the state in which the segment is lit. You may make it do. Alternatively, the variable display may be started from the state where the same one segment is always turned on. Special figure 1
The lighting mode at the time of starting the fluctuation in the display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be the same or different.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuating Processing]
FIG. 56 shows the special figure 1 changing process in the special figure 1 game process described above (step Y109).
showed that. In the special figure 1 changing process, first, the symbol determination number of times of output is updated by +1 (step Y621), a command is loaded from the decoration special figure 1 command area and prepared (step Y622), and an effect command setting process is performed. Perform (step Y623).

Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y625). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there is a case where the game machine is forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of the fluctuation, and therefore, when the fluctuation is stopped, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. .

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the final variation has a high probability (step Y626). When the special figure 1 fluctuation display game has high probability final fluctuation, the high probability final fluctuation flag of special figure 1 is set. If the final variation is not a high probability (step Y626; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y627), and the process proceeds to step Y629. In the case of a high probability final change (step Y626; Y), the display time at the time of the high probability final change is set (step Y628), and the process proceeds to step Y629. Note that the display time (stop time) of the special figure 1 variable display game set here is 600 ms in the case of outage, 2000 ms in the case of big hit, and 6 in the case of small hit if it is not a high probability final change.
A display time of 00 ms is set. In the case of a high probability final variation, a display time of 2000 ms is set regardless of the result.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is out of order, that is, whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of place (step Y629). When the special figure 1 is out of step (step Y629; Y)
Moves to step Y644. If the special figure 1 is not out of step (step Y629;
N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y630). Whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is not being executed (step Y630; Y), the process proceeds to step Y640. Also, when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y
630; Y) determines whether the special figure 2 display processing is in progress (step Y631). In other words, in this case, the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is forcibly stopped with the result of the detachment based on the special figure 1 variable display game having a special result. Note that even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already ended the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

When the special figure 2 is being displayed (step Y631; Y), the process proceeds to step Y633. If the special figure 2 display processing is not in progress (step Y631; N), the symbol determination count output count is updated by +1 (step Y632), and the special figure 1 display time set above as the special figure 2 display time. A display time of +4 ms is set (step Y633). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 + the display time of 4 ms as the display time of the special figure 2, the display time of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 ends at the same time. Even when the special figure 2 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and the display time is newly started.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y634), a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y635), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y636). ). Thereafter, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y637), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y638), and a special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is performed (step Y639).

Then, the command is loaded from the decoration special figure 1 command area and saved in the winning symbol command area (step Y640), whether the special figure 1 is a small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit. Is determined (step Y641). If the special figure is a small hit (step Y641; Y), the process proceeds to step Y644. Also, if the special figure 1 is not a small hit (
Step Y641; N), that is, if it is a big win, information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y642), and the special figure 1 big prize opening release information Information is loaded from the area and saved in the special winning opening release information area (step Y643).

After that, information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol saving area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y644), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y645).
Then, the special figure 1 display process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuating Processing]
FIG. 57 shows the special figure 2 changing process in the special figure 2 game process described above (step Y140).
showed that. In the special figure 2 changing process, first, the symbol determination number of times output is updated by +1 (step Y651), a command is loaded from the special figure 2 command area and prepared (step Y652), and the effect command setting process is executed. Perform (step Y653).

Next, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y655). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the final variation has a high probability (step Y656). When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game has high probability final fluctuation, the high probability final fluctuation flag of special figure 2 is set.

If the final variation is not a high probability (step Y656; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y657), and the process proceeds to step Y659. In the case of a high probability final variation (step Y656; Y), the display time at the time of the high probability final variation is set (step Y658), and the process proceeds to step Y659. Note that the display time (stop time) of the special figure 2 variable display game set here is 600 ms in the case of outage, 2000 ms in the case of big hit, and 600 m in the case of small hit if it is not a high probability final change.
The display time of s is set. If it is a high-probability final variation, 2 regardless of the result
A display time of 000 ms is set.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is out of order, that is, whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of place (step Y659). When the special figure 2 is out of place (step Y659; Y)
Proceeds to step Y674. If the special figure 2 is not out of step (step Y659;
N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y660). Whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

When the special figure 1 variable display game is not being executed (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y670. Further, when the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y
660; Y) determines whether special figure 1 display processing is in progress (step Y661). That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variable display game that is being executed is forcibly stopped by the result of the detachment based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result. In addition, even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already ended the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

When the special figure 1 display process is in progress (step Y661; Y), the process proceeds to step Y664. When the special figure 1 display process is not in progress (step Y661; N), the symbol determination number of times output is updated by +1 (step Y662), and the process proceeds to step Y664.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y664), the command is loaded from the special figure 1 command area and prepared (step Y665), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y666). ). Thereafter, a special decoration figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y668), and a special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is performed (step Y669).

Then, the command is loaded from the decoration special figure 2 command area and saved in the winning symbol command area (step Y670), whether the special figure 2 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. Is determined (step Y671). If the special figure 2 is a small hit (step Y671; Y), the process proceeds to step Y674. Also, if the special figure 2 is not a small hit (
Step Y671; N), that is, if it is a big hit, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y672), and the special figure 2 big prize opening information Information is loaded from the area and saved in the special winning opening release information area (step Y673).

After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol saving area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y674), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y675).
Then, the special figure 2 display processing is terminated.

[Special figure 1 display transition setting process 1]
FIG. 58 shows the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y645) in the special figure 1 changing process described above. In this special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, first, a special figure 1 game process number “2” related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y681), and a process number is stored in the special figure 1 game process number area. Is saved (step Y682).

Next, a signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y683). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to OFF. Thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 display 51, a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y684). ), The special figure 1 changing process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special figure 2 display transition setting process 1]
FIG. 59 shows the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y675) in the special figure 2 changing process described above. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, first, a special figure 2 game process number “2” relating to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y691), and a process number is stored in the special figure 2 game process number area. Is saved (step Y692).

Next, a signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y693). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to OFF. Thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y694). ), The special figure 2 changing process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special figure 1 display transition setting process 2]
FIG. 60 shows the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y669) in the special figure 2 changing process described above. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, first, a special figure 1 game process number “2” related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y701), and a process number is stored in the special figure 1 game process number area. Is saved (step Y702).

Next, a signal related to the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y703), and then, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 1 is displayed. The stop flag related to the change stop on the display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 change control flag area (step Y704).

Up to this point, the process is the same as the above-described special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, and hereinafter, information for setting a result of the deviation is set. First, the shift stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y705), and the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area is cleared (step Y706).

Next, the special figure 1 big prize opening release information area is cleared (step Y707), and the small hit flag 1
The shift information is saved in the area (step Y708), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y709). Then, the special figure 1 stop symbol save area is cleared (step Y710), and the shift stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y7).
11) The symbol data corresponding to the off-stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y712), and the special diagram 1 display process transition setting process 2 is terminated.

[Special figure 2 display transition setting process 2]
FIG. 61 shows special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y639) in the special figure 1 changing process described above. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, first, a special figure 2 game process number "2" related to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y721), and a process number is stored in the special figure 2 game process number area. Is saved (step Y722).

Next, a signal relating to the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y723), and then, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure 2 is displayed. A stop flag related to the change stop on the display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 change control flag area (step Y724).

Up to this point, the process is the same as the above-described special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, and thereafter, setting of information for obtaining a result of losing is performed. First, the shift stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y725), and the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area is cleared (step Y726).

Next, the special figure 2 big prize opening release information area is cleared (step Y727), and the small hit flag 2
The shift information is saved in the area (step Y728), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y729). Then, the special figure 2 stop symbol saving area is cleared (step Y730), and the shift stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y7).
31), the symbol data corresponding to the loss stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y732), and the special diagram 2 display process transition setting process 2 is terminated.

56 to 61, when one special figure fluctuation display game has a special result, the other special figure fluctuation display game is forcibly stopped by the result of detachment. That is, based on the special figure 1 variable display game having a special result, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped by the result of detachment, and the special figure 2 variable display game is determined to have the special result. Based on this, the second end control process in which the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped by the result of the deviation is performed.

In addition, in the process (steps Y732 and Y712) of saving the symbol data corresponding to the loss stop symbol number in the test signal output data area, the test signal corresponding to the result of the special symbol variation display game stopped by the test firing test device is captured. Just go by the timing. For example, the process of saving the symbol data corresponding to the loss stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (steps Y712 and Y732) and the process of saving the signal related to the end of variation in the test signal output data area (steps Y703 and Y723). The interrupt timing after the processing (steps Y712 and Y732) for saving the symbol data corresponding to the loss stop symbol number in the test signal output data area is performed. Thus, a process (steps Y703 and Y723) for saving a signal related to the end of fluctuation in the test signal output data area may be performed. In other words, for the special figure variation display game that is changed to the outlier result, a test signal indicating that the result is a deviation result may be output before outputting the test signal related to the end of the variation.

From the above, the first variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) executes the second variation display game when the execution control of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) is performed. When the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) for which execution control is performed by the control means (game control device 100) has a special result, the first variation display game for which execution control is performed Can be terminated as a result other than the special result, and the second variation display game execution control means is executed by the first variation display game execution control means when executing the execution control of the second variation display game. When the first variation display game being controlled has a special result, the second variation display game performing the execution control can be terminated as a result other than the special result. The Rukoto. As a result, when a special result is derived in one variation display game, the other variation display game can be forcibly stopped by the result, so that no trouble occurs even when simultaneous variation is performed. Can be.

[Special figure 1 display processing]
62 and 63, the special figure 1 display process in the special figure 1 game process described above (step Y).
110). In the special figure 1 display process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded (
In step Y751), the small hit flag 1 area is cleared (step Y752).

Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded (step Y753), and the big hit flag 1 area is cleared (step Y754). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit information (step Y755).
755; N) proceeds to step Y777. If it is a big hit (step Y7
55; Y) is a test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the special figure 1 variable display game (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device active signal ON, the special symbol 1
The hit signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y756).

Thereafter, a round number upper limit table is set (step Y759), and the round number upper limit value (16, 8, 4 or 2 in the case of this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained to obtain the round number upper limit value. Save in the area (step Y760). Further, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y761).

Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the symbol command area and prepared (step Y762), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y7).
63). Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y764), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y765).

Next, a signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning a big hit in the special winning opening information and the special figure display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y766). In the case of this embodiment,
In step Y766, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning opening information and the probability state. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the prize opening information and the probability state. For example, a jackpot 2 signal is ON when the jackpot type is a jackpot other than the 2R probability variation D1, and is ON when the jackpot type is the 2R probability variation D1 in the high probability state, and the 2R probability variation in the low probability state. When it is D1, it is turned OFF. The big hit 3 signal is ON when the big hit type is a big hit other than the 2R probability variation D1, and is OFF when the 2R probability variation D1 in the high probability state, and the 2R probability variation in the low probability state. O if D1
N.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the winning prize opening information (for example, 5000 ms)
3000 ms or 4 ms) is set (step Y767), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y768). And
It is determined whether it is a big hit to open the top large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (step Y769).

If it is a big hit to open the upper prize winning opening (step Y769; Y), the upper prize winning opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y770), and the illegal extra monitoring period flag is set in the upper winning prize illegal monitoring period flag area. Is saved (step Y771), and the process proceeds to step Y774. In addition, when it is not a big hit to open the upper big prize opening (step Y769; N), that is, when it is a big hit to open the lower big prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39), the lower big prize opening illegal prize number area Is cleared (step Y772), the fraud monitoring period outside flag is saved in the lower large winning prize fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y773), and the process proceeds to step Y774.

Next, 3 is set as the process number (step Y774) and saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y775). Furthermore, a fanfare / interval process transition setting process (step Y776) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Y755, if Special Figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y755; N),
In other words, if the big hit flag 1 is out of date information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (small hit information) (step Y777). If the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y777; Y), it is determined whether it is a high probability final variation, that is, whether it is the last special figure variation display game in which a lottery is performed in a high probability state. Determination is made (step Y778).

If it is not the high probability final fluctuation (step Y778; N), the process proceeds to step Y783. In the case of high probability final variation (step Y778; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y779), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y780).
). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y781), and the left-handed instruction notification flag and the high probability final variation flag are cleared (step Y782). By clearing the left-handed instruction notification flag, a left-handed instruction notification command is set and notification for instructing left-handed is performed in the special process shown in FIG.

Thereafter, a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step Y783).
Then, an effect command setting process is performed (step Y784). Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y785), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y78).
6) Save the signal related to the right handing instruction in the test signal output data area (step Y79).
0). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y791). As a result, the first game state display unit 77 is turned on, and a display for instructing a right turn is made.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit to open the top prize winning opening (first special variable winning prize apparatus 38) (step Y792). If it is a small hit to open the top big winning opening (step Y792; Y)
Clears the upper prize winning portion illegal winning number area (step Y793), saves the fraud monitoring out-of-flight monitoring period flag in the upper big prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y794), and step Y7
97. In addition, when it is not a small hit to open the top large winning opening (step Y792; N
), That is, when it is a small hit to open the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39),
The lower prize winning portion illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y795), the fraud monitoring out-of-flight monitoring period flag is saved in the lower major winning prize fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y796), and step Y797
Migrate to Then, the special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process (step Y79)
7) is performed, and the special figure 1 display processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Y777 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y777; N), it is a high probability final variation, that is, the last special drawing in which a lottery in a high probability state is performed. It is determined whether the game is a variable display game (step Y798).

If it is not the high probability final fluctuation (step Y798; N), the process proceeds to step Y806. In the case of a high probability final variation (step Y798; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y799), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y800).
). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y801), the left-handed instruction notification flag and the high probability final variation flag are cleared (step Y802), and the high probability state and the short time state are A signal relating to the end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y803). Here, the big hit 2 signal is set to be OFF.

Next, the second based on the small hit in the special figure 2, that is, based on the small hit generated in the special figure 2 variable display game
It is determined whether or not the special game state is in effect (step Y804). If it is during the small hit of special figure 2 (step Y804; Y), the process proceeds to step Y807. As a result, the state of instructing the right handing is maintained. In addition, when it is not in the small hit of special figure 2 (step Y804; N),
A signal relating to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y805), and the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y806). Thereafter, the special figure status area in the special figure 1 state is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y807), the special figure 1 normal process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y808), and the special figure 1 display process is terminated. .

[Special figure 2 display processing]
FIGS. 64 and 65 show the special figure 2 display process (step Y in the special figure 2 game process described above).
141). In this special figure 2 display process, a process equivalent to the above-described special figure 1 display process is performed for special figure 2. In the special figure 2 display processing, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 variation start process is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag is set. The two areas are cleared (step Y812).

Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y813), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step Y814). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit information (step Y815).
815; N) moves to step Y837. Also, if it is a big hit (step Y8
15; Y) is a test signal relating to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the special figure 2 variable display game (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device active signal ON, the special symbol 2
The hit signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

Thereafter, the round number upper limit table is set (step Y819), and the round number upper limit value (16, 8, 4 or 2 in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained to obtain the round number upper limit value. Save in the area (step Y820). Further, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y821).

Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the symbol command area and prepared (step Y822), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y8).
23). Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y824), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y825).

Next, a signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning a big win in the special winning opening information and the special figure changing display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y826). In the case of this embodiment,
In step Y826, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the prize opening information and the probability state. For example, a jackpot 2 signal is ON when the jackpot type is a jackpot other than the 2R probability variation D1, and is ON when the jackpot type is the 2R probability variation D1 in the high probability state, and the 2R probability variation in the low probability state. When it is D1, it is turned OFF. The big hit 3 signal is ON when the big hit type is a big hit other than the 2R probability variation D1, and is OFF when the 2R probability variation D1 in the high probability state, and the 2R probability variation in the low probability state. O if D1
N.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the winning prize opening information (for example, 5000 ms)
3000 ms or 4 ms) is set (step Y827), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y828). And
It is determined whether or not it is a big hit to open the top large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (step Y829).

If it is a big hit to open the top prize winning opening (step Y829; Y), the upper prize winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (step Y830), and the fraud monitoring period flag is set in the upper university winning prize illegal monitoring period flag area. Is saved (step Y831), and the process proceeds to step Y834. In addition, when it is not a big hit to open the upper big prize opening (step Y829; N), that is, when it is a big hit to open the lower big prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39), the lower big prize opening illegal prize number area Is cleared (step Y832), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y833), and the process proceeds to step Y834.

Next, 3 is set as the process number (step Y834) and saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y835). Furthermore, a fanfare / interval process transition setting process (step Y836) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Y815, if Special Figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N),
In other words, if the big hit flag 2 is out of date information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information) (step Y837). If the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y837; Y), it is determined whether it is a high probability final variation, that is, whether it is the last special figure variation display game in which a lottery is performed in a high probability state. Determination is made (step Y838).

If it is not the high probability final fluctuation (step Y838; N), the process proceeds to step Y843. In the case of high probability final variation (step Y838; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y839), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y840).
). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y841), and the left-handed instruction notification flag and the high probability final variation flag are cleared (step Y842). By clearing the left-handed instruction notification flag, a left-handed instruction notification command is set and notification for instructing left-handed is performed in the special process shown in FIG.

Thereafter, a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step Y843).
Then, an effect command setting process is performed (step Y844). Further, a small hitting fanfare command is prepared (step Y845), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y84).
6) The signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y85).
0). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y851). As a result, the first game state display unit 77 is turned on, and a display for instructing a right turn is made.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit to open the top prize winning opening (the first special variable winning prize apparatus 38) (step Y852). When it is a small hit to open the top prize winning opening (step Y852; Y).
Clears the upper prize winning portion illegal winning number area (step Y853), saves the fraud monitoring non-period monitoring flag in the upper prize winning portion fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y854), and step Y8.
57. In addition, when it is not a small hit to open the top large winning opening (step Y852; N
), That is, when it is a small hit to open the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39),
The lower prize winning portion illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y855), an illegal monitoring non-period monitoring flag is saved in the lower major winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y856), and step Y857.
Migrate to Then, the special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process (step Y85)
7) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Y837 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y837; N), it is a high probability final variation, that is, the last special drawing in which a lottery is performed in a high probability state. It is determined whether the game is a variable display game (step Y858). If it is not the high probability final fluctuation (step Y858; N), the process proceeds to step Y866. If it is a high probability final variation (step Y858; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y859), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y860). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y861),
The left-handed instruction notification flag and the high-probability final variation flag are cleared (step Y862), and signals related to the end of the high-probability state and the short-time state are saved in the external information output data area (step Y863). Here, the big hit 2 signal is set to be OFF.

Next, the second based on the small hit in the special figure 1, that is, the small hit generated in the special figure 1 variable display game.
It is determined whether or not the special game state is in effect (step Y864). When it is during the small hit of special figure 1 (step Y864; Y), the process proceeds to step Y867. As a result, the state of instructing the right handing is maintained. In addition, when it is not in the small hit of special figure 1 (step Y864; N),
A signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y865), and the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y866). Thereafter, the special figure status area in the special figure 2 change is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y867), the special figure 2 normal process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y868), and the special figure 2 display process is terminated. .

That is, the first special game occurrence in which the game control device 100 generates the first special game state in which the special variable winning device is released with the operation of the condition device based on the fact that the variable display game has become the first special result. And a second special game generating means for generating a second special game state for releasing the special variable winning device without operating the condition device based on the fact that the variable display game has become the second special result. Eggplant.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 66 shows the fanfare / process in the special figure 1 display process and the special figure 2 display process described above.
Details of the in-interval process transition setting process (steps Y776, Y836) will be described. In this fanfare / interval process transition setting process, first, a signal relating to the start of the big hit (first special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y8).
71). Here, one big hit signal that is output in big hit or small hit is set to ON. Next, a signal relating to the end of the high-probability state and the time-short state (special symbol variation time shortening state) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y872). Here, special symbol 1 high probability state signal O
FF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF,
The special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal is set to OFF.

Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step Y873), and the number with a low probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y874). The special figure low probability flag is saved in the flag area (step Y875).

Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step Y876), and the special figure variation display that can be executed in the high probability state The high probability variation count area for managing the number of games is cleared (step Y877). As a result, the high-probability state and the short-time state are terminated, and the normal probability state and the normal state are obtained.

Next, the big hit information is saved in the special figure status area (step Y878), and the high probability final fluctuation flag area is cleared (step Y879). Further, a signal relating to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y880), and the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y881). Thereafter, the ordinary low probability flag is saved in the ordinary game mode flag area (step Y882), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process]
FIG. 67 shows the special figure 1 small hit fanfare process transition setting process (step Y797) in the special figure 1 display process described above. In this special figure 1 small hitting fanfare process transition setting process, first, “7” relating to the small hitting fanfare process is set as the process number (step Y891), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save (step Y892).

Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y893), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y894). Here, one big hit signal and four big hit signals that are output in the big hit or the small hit are set to ON. Furthermore, a signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y895). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is ON.
Set to.

After that, the small hitting information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y896), and the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y897).
The small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process]
FIG. 68 shows the special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process (step Y857) in the special figure 2 display middle process described above. In the special figure 2 small hit fanfare process transition setting process, first, “7” relating to the small hit fanfare process is set as the process number (step Y901), and the process number is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Save (step Y902).

Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y903), and a signal related to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y904). Here, one big hit signal and four big hit signals that are output in the big hit or the small hit are set to ON. Further, a signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y905). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is ON.
Set to.

Thereafter, the small hitting information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y906), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y907), and the special figure 2 is saved.
The small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process is terminated.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
FIG. 69 shows the fanfare / game in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process.
In-interval processing (steps Y111 and Y142) is shown. In this fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step Y95).
1) Prepare a round command corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the number of rounds (step Y
952), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y953).

Next, the big hit midway processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the big winning opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y954), and the pointer initial value is saved in the big hit middle processing control pointer area (step Y955). As an initial value for the big hit processing control pointer, 0 is set when opening and closing is repeated in one round. Here, the 5th R of 16R probability variation F3 (special drawing 2 top winning opening / closing pattern 5) corresponds. Further, in the case of performing one continuous release in one round, 21 is set as the jackpot operation end value. Note that the initial value may be set to other than 0 according to the number of times of opening and closing in one round.

Then, the winning opening opening time corresponding to the winning opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y956), and 4 is set as the process number (step Y957). The opening time set here is, for example, any one of 200 ms, 600 ms, 1600 ms, and 29000 ms.

Next, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y958). If it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y958; Y), the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y959). ), The special winning opening opening time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y960). On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y958; N), the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y961), and the big prize opening time is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area. (Step Y962).

Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit for opening the top prize winning opening (first special variable winning prize apparatus 38) (
Step Y963). Whether or not it is a big hit for opening the top prize winning opening can be determined from the set big opening opening information. If it is a big hit for opening the top prize winning opening (step Y96)
3; Y) performs a process transition setting process 1 during the opening of the special winning opening (step Y964), and ends the process during the fanfare / interval. If the big winning opening is not a big hit (step Y963; N), the process for setting the winning prize opening process transition setting process 2 is performed (step Y965).
), The process during the fanfare / interval is terminated.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 70 shows the process for setting process 1 for opening the special winning opening during the fanfare / interval process described above (step Y964). This big winning opening open process transition setting process 1
First, a signal related to the opening of the upper prize winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y971). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, in order to open the opening / closing member 38c of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper prize winning port on-data is saved in the special winning prize solenoid output data area (step Y972), and the number of winning prizes to the big prize winning opening is counted. The winning prize mouth count is cleared (step Y973), and the winning prize opening opening process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 71 shows the process for setting a process for setting a special winning opening during the above-described fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step Y965). This special winning opening open process transition setting process 2
First, a signal related to the opening of the lower prize winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y981). Here, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, in order to open the opening / closing member 39c of the second special variable winning device 39, the lower big winning opening on-data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y982), and the number of wins to the big winning opening is counted. The winning prize mouth count is cleared (step Y983), and the winning prize opening opening process transition setting process 2 is terminated.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
FIG. 72 shows the special winning opening opening process (steps Y112, Y143) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process described above. In the big winning opening opening process, first, the big hit processing control pointer is loaded (step Y1001), and it is determined whether or not the loaded value is equal to or larger than the big hit operation end value (here 21) (step Y1002).

When the loaded value is not equal to or greater than the jackpot operation end value (21 in this case) (step Y100
2; N) performs a big hit operation transition setting process (step Y1003), updates the big hit mid-process control pointer by +1 (step Y1004), and ends the big prize opening open process. In this case, opening / closing is performed during one round, and the opening / closing mode of the special variable winning device is set according to the updated jackpot processing control pointer.

On the other hand, if the loaded value is greater than or equal to the jackpot operation end value (here 21) (step Y
1002; Y) determines whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area (step Y1005). If it is not the final round (step Y1005; N)
Prepares an interval command related to the interval between rounds (step Y100).
6) An effect command setting process (step Y1008) is performed. If it is the final round (step Y1005; Y), an ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special gaming state is prepared (step Y1007), and an effect command setting process (step Y1008). I do.

Next, the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the special winning opening information is set (step Y1009),
As the processing number, 5 is set for the winning ball remaining ball processing (step Y1010). As the remaining sphere processing time, 600 ms, 800 ms, or 1400 ms is set. And
It is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y1011).

If it is a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1011; Y), the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1012), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 1 game process timer area (step Y1012). Step Y1013). On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y1011; N), the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1).
014), the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y10).
15).

After that, the off data is saved in the prize winning solenoid output data area (step Y1
016), the special winning opening opening process is terminated. In step Y1016, the off data is set for both the upper prize winning solenoid and the lower prize winning solenoid, and the process of closing any of the big winning prizes is performed.

[Big hit action transition setting process]
FIG. 73 shows the jackpot motion transition setting process (step Y
1004). In the big hit operation transition setting process, first, branch processing is performed depending on whether the value of the big hit mid-process control pointer is an even number or an odd number (step Y1021). Here, 0
Branch processing is performed assuming that is an even number.

If the value of the big hit processing control pointer is an even number in step Y1021, a wait time corresponding to the control pointer is set (step Y1022). Here, 1500 ms is set as the wait time. Note that different wait times may be set depending on the value of the pointer. Next, off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1023), and the process proceeds to step Y1026. Step Y1023
In this case, off data is set for both the upper prize winning solenoid and the lower prize winning solenoid, and a process for closing any of the big winning prizes is performed.

On the other hand, if the value of the big hit processing control pointer is an odd number in step Y1021, the big winning opening opening time corresponding to the control pointer is set (step Y1024). Here, when the value of the big hit processing control pointer is 1 to 19 as the big prize opening time, it is 200 m.
Set s, and if it is 21, set 25000 ms. Next, the top prize opening on-data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step Y1025).
Move to 1026. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, only the top prize winning opening (the first special variable prize winning device 38) is repeatedly opened and closed during one round. Therefore, in step Y1024, on data is saved for the top prize winning solenoid. doing. Of course, depending on the setting of the gaming machine, it may be possible to repeat the opening and closing of the lower large prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) in one round.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1026). If it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1026; Y), the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area ( Step Y1027), the jackpot movement transition setting process is terminated. Special figure 1
If it is not a big hit (step Y1026; N), the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area (step Y1028), and the big hit action transition setting process is terminated. With the above processing, it is possible to repeatedly open and close the big prize opening in one round.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
FIG. 74 shows the big winning opening remaining ball process (steps Y113 and Y144) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process described above. In this winning ball remaining ball process, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area to determine whether the current round is the final round. (Step Y1041)
.

If the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step Y
1041; N) saves a signal related to the completion of the big winning opening in the test signal output data area (step Y1042). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to OFF and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF. Next, an interval time corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the current round number is set (step Y1043), and 3 for the fanfare / interval processing is set as the process number (step Y1044).

The interval period between rounds is a period from when the remaining sphere processing time elapses from the end of the round to when the interval time elapses after the remaining sphere processing time elapses. For example, in the case of the special prize opening / closing pattern 1 in FIG. 1, since the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the interval time of 600 ms are set, the interval period becomes 2000 ms, and the interval effect is displayed on the display device 41 or the like in this interval period. Is executed.

On the other hand, when the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step Y1
041; Y) performs a jackpot end process transition setting process (step Y1045), sets an ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step Y1046), and displays a special figure 1 big hit end process or special figure 2 big hit as a process number. 6 is set for the end process (step Y1).
047).

And it is determined whether it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1048). If it is a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1048; Y), the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1049), and the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game process timer area (
Step Y1050), the winning prize remaining ball processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y1048; N), the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1051), and the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area (step Y1051). Step Y1052), the special winning opening remaining ball processing is terminated.

The ending period from the end of the final round to the end of the special gaming state is a period from the end of the final round until the ending time elapses after the remaining sphere processing time elapses. For example, if it is 1 in the special drawing 1 top winning opening and closing pattern 1
Since the remaining sphere processing time of 400 ms and the ending time of 9600 ms are set, the ending period is 11000 ms, and the ending effect is executed on the display device 41 or the like during this ending period.

[Big jackpot end process transition setting process]
FIG. 75 shows the jackpot end process transition setting process (step Y1045) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process. In this jackpot end process transition setting process, first, a signal relating to the end of opening of the big prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1071).
. Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is OFF and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is OFF
Set to.

Next, the information on the number-of-winner count area for storing the number of winning prizes is cleared (step Y1072), and the information on the number-of-rounds area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step Y1073). ), Information on the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit value of the round number in the special game state is cleared (step Y1074).

Then, the information of the round number upper limit information area storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the round number is cleared (step Y1075), and the big winning opening opening information area for storing the flag for determining the opening information of the big winning opening is stored. The information is cleared (step Y1076), the information of the big hit control pointer area for setting the opening / closing mode of the big prize opening is cleared (step Y1077), and the big hit end process transition setting process is ended.

[Special figure 1 big hit end processing]
FIG. 76 shows the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y11 in the special figure 1 game process described above).
4) was shown. In the special figure 1 big hit ending process, first, “0” is set as the process number related to the special figure 1 ordinary process (step Y1101), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1102).

Next, a signal related to the end of jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y).
1103). Here, the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state (the normal power support state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1104). Here, the big hit 2 signal is set to ON. Note that the jackpot 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1105). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 signal and the special symbol 2 signal are set to OFF. Next, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1106). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, and the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal are set to ON.

Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y
1107). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, a number having a high probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1108). In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, since the time is always short during high probability, these numbers are not distinguished from each other and are numbered with high probability. Thereafter, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1109), and the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y11).
10).

Next, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1111), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1112). The special figure status area is cleared (step Y1113).
Note that clearing the special figure status area results in a special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed.

Thereafter, a high probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1114).
), An initial value (here, 50) is saved in the high probability variation count area for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the high probability state (step Y1115). Further, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1116), and the special figure 2 game wait time value (here 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1117), save the usual figure high probability flag in the usual figure game mode flag area (
Step Y1118), the special figure 1 big hit end processing is ended.

By performing the special figure 1 big hit end process, it is possible to start the special figure variation display game for both special figure 1 and special figure 2, but in the timer interruption process, the special figure 2 game is executed after the special figure 1 game process. In order to perform the process, a special interrupt process that starts the special figure fluctuation display game is performed in the special figure 2 game process by the timer interruption that has performed the special figure 1 big hit end process. Will be able to start first. Therefore, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step Y1117,
The start process for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interruption process, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interruption. Note that the special figure 2 variable display game may be started first without setting the special figure 2 game wait time value.

In other words, the second variation display game execution control means is the second variation display game execution control means until the first variation display game execution control means can execute the process related to the start of the first variation display game after the game control device 100 ends the special gaming state. A game process standby means is provided for preventing the execution of the process relating to the start of the two-variable display game.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
FIG. 77 shows the special figure 2 jackpot end process (step Y14) in the special figure 2 game process described above.
5). This special figure 2 big hit end processing is the step Y11 in the above special figure 1 big hit processing.
The process is the same except that 17 is not performed.

First, “0” is set as the process number related to the special process of the special figure 2 (step Y1121),
The process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1122). Next, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1123).
Here, the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state (the normal power support state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1124). Here, the big hit 2 signal is set to ON. Note that the jackpot 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1125). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 signal and the special symbol 2 signal are set to OFF. Next, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1126). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, and the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal are set to ON.

Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y
1127). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, a number having a high probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1128). In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, since the time is always short during high probability, these numbers are not distinguished from each other and are numbered with high probability. Thereafter, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1129), and the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y11).
30).

Next, the fraud monitoring flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1131), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1132). The special figure status area is cleared (step Y1133).
Note that clearing the special figure status area results in a special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed.

Thereafter, a high probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1134).
), An initial value (50 in this case) is saved in the high probability variation count area for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the high probability state (step Y1135). Further, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1136), the common figure high probability flag is saved in the usual figure game mode flag area (step Y1137), and the special figure 2 big hit ends. The process ends.

By these special figure 1 big hit processing and special figure 2 big hit processing, a specific game state that is a high probability state and a short time state is set until 50 special figure variable display games are executed after the first special game state is finished. It will be. In other words, the game control device 100 is capable of generating a specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state in which the probability that the result of the variable display game will be a special result is higher than the normal state over a predetermined period after the end of the special game state. Make. Further, the specific game state generating means is configured to increase the probability that the result of the variable display game is the first special result over the predetermined period as the specific game state, compared to the normal state.

[Small fanfare during processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare process (steps Y115 and Y146) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 78, in this small hitting fanfare process, first, branching by an open pattern is performed (step Y1).
201).

At step Y1201, the opening pattern is 1 per hit (Special Figure 1 lower big prize opening / closing pattern 1)
If it is, a command for opening a small hit for opening the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is prepared (step Y1202), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y1203).
Next, 8 which is related to the small hit processing is set as the processing number (step Y1204).
The process number is saved in the game process number area (step Y1205).

Thereafter, the small hit release time 1 (here 48 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1206), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1207). Here, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, save the lower prize winning on data in the prize winning solenoid output data area (
Step Y1208) and the process proceeds to Step Y1230.

Also, if the opening pattern is 2 in small hits (special figure 2 lower big prize opening / closing pattern 2) in step Y1201, the small hitting opening command for opening the lower big prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) is issued. Prepare (step Y1209) and perform an effect command setting process (step Y121)
0). Next, 8 is set as the process number for the small hitting process (step Y1211).
The processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1212).

Thereafter, the small hit release time 2 (here, 1600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1213), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1214). Here, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the lower big prize opening on data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step Y1215), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

If the opening pattern is 3 in small hits (special figure 2 upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 6) in step Y1201, a small hitting opening command for opening the upper prize winning opening (first special variable prize winning device 38) is issued. Prepare (step Y1216) and perform a production command setting process (step Y121)
7). Next, 8 is set as the process number for the small hitting process (step Y1218).
The process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1219).

Thereafter, the small hit release time 3 (here, 1200 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1220), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1221). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the upper prize winning opening on data is saved in the big winning prize solenoid output data area (step Y1222), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

In addition, if the opening pattern is 4 in small hits (special figure 2 top prize opening opening / closing pattern 7) in step Y1201, the top hitting opening (first special variable prize winning device 38) opening small hits opening command is issued. Prepare (step Y1223) and perform a production command setting process (step Y122)
4). Next, 8 is set as the processing number for the small hitting process (step Y1225).
The process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1226).

Thereafter, the small hit release time 4 (here, 1600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1227), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1228). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the top winning opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1229), and the process proceeds to step Y1230. After processing according to these types of small wins, clear the big winning count area where the number of winning prizes is counted (
Step Y1230), the small hitting fanfare processing is terminated.

[Processing during small hits]
FIG. 79 shows the small hit / medium process (steps Y116 and Y147) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this small hitting process, first, a small hitting end screen command is prepared (step Y1241), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y12).
42). Next, branching by an open pattern is performed (step Y1243).

At step Y1243, the opening pattern is 1 per hit (Special Figure 1 lower big prize opening / closing pattern 1)
Is set to 9 as the processing number for the small hit remaining ball processing (step Y12).
44) The process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1245). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 1 (here, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1246), and the off data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1247). The hit processing ends.

At step Y1243, the opening pattern is 2 per hit (Special Figure 2 lower big prize opening / closing pattern 2)
Is set to 9 as the processing number for the small hit remaining ball processing (step Y12).
48) The process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1249). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 2 (here, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1250), and the off data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step Y1251). The hit processing ends.

If the open pattern is 3 or 4 per small hit in step Y1243 (special winning opening / closing pattern 6 or 7 in Special Figure 2), 9 is set as the processing number for the small hit remaining ball process (step Y1252). The process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1).
253). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 3 (here, 800 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1254), and the off data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1255). The hit processing ends.

In steps Y1247, Y1251, and Y1255, off data is set for both the upper prize winning solenoid and the lower prize winning solenoid, and the process of closing any of the big winning prizes is performed.

[Small ball remaining treatment]
FIG. 80 shows the small hit remaining ball process (steps Y117 and Y148) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this small hit remaining sphere process, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit of special figure 1 (step Y1271). If the special figure 1 is a small hit (step Y1271; Y), 10 is set as the process number for the special figure 1 small hit end process (
Step Y1272), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (Step Y127)
1273). Next, the small hit ending time (here, 100 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1274), and the process proceeds to step Y1278.

If the special figure 1 is not a small hit (step Y1271; N), 10 is set as the process number for the special figure 2 small hit process (step Y1275), and the process number is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Save (step Y1276). Next, the small hitting ending time (100 ms here) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1277),
Control goes to step Y1278.

Then, a signal relating to the end of the small hitting operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1278). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal are set to OFF. Further, the winning prize count area is cleared (step Y127).
9) The small hit remaining sphere process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
FIG. 81 shows the special figure 1 small hit end process (step Y11 in the special figure 1 game process described above).
8). In this special figure 1 small hit end process, first, 0 is set as the process number for the special figure 1 normal process (step Y1301), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1302).

Next, a signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y).
1303). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1304), the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1305), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1304). Y1306). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating a state in which neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed is set.

Next, it is determined whether the probability is high (step Y1307). If the probability is high (step Y1307; Y), the process proceeds to step Y1310. Also, if not in high probability (
Step Y1307; N) saves the signal relating to the left-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (step Y1308). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. And the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1309).
The special figure 2 game wait time value (here, 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1310). Again, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area so that the start process for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interruption process. And the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interruption. Note that the special figure 2 variable display game may be started first without setting the special figure 2 game wait time value. After that, a signal regarding the end of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y
1311), the special figure 1 small hit end processing is ended. Here, the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 4 signal are set to OFF.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 82 shows the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y14) in the special figure 2 game process described above.
9). In this special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 is set as a process number for the special figure 2 ordinary process (step Y1331), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1332).

Next, a signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y).
1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the fraud monitoring flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y13).
35). After that, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y13).
36) The special figure status area is cleared (step Y1337). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating a state in which neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed is set.

Next, it is determined whether the probability is high (step Y1338). If the probability is high (step Y1338; Y), the special figure 2 small hit end processing is terminated. If the probability is not high (step Y1338; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1339). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF.
Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1340).
) And saves a signal regarding the end of the small hit in the external information output data area (step Y13).
41), the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended. Here, the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 4 signal are set to OFF.

[Design variation control processing]
FIG. 83 shows the symbol variation control process (steps Y120 and Y153) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. The symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol and setting the display data of the special symbol on the special symbol 1 display 51 or the special symbol 2 display 52. In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether the variation control flag of the symbol to be controlled (Special Fig. 1 or Special Fig. 2) is changing (Step Y1401).

If the fluctuation control flag is fluctuating (step Y1402; Y), a symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the control target symbol is acquired (step Y1403), and the blinking control timer related to the control target symbol is acquired. -1 is updated (step Y1404), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0, that is, whether the time is up (step Y1405).

If the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (step Y1405; N), step Y140
Move to 8. If the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (step Y1405; Y), the initial value of the blinking control timer (here, 100 ms) is saved in the blinking control timer area to be controlled (step Y1406), Is updated by +1 (step Y1407), and display data corresponding to the value of the target fluctuation symbol number area is acquired (step Y1408). After that, save the acquired display data in the target segment area (
Step Y1411), the symbol variation control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation control flag is not changing (step Y1402; N), a symbol display table (for stoppage) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step Y1409). Then, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step Y1410).
) Save the acquired display data in the target segment area (step Y1411),
The symbol variation control process is terminated. Thereby, the special figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special figure display to be controlled among the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

[Segment LED editing processing]
Next, the segment LED editing process (step X112) in the timer interrupt process described above.
) Will be described in detail. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, the universal figure hold indicator 75, the first game state display unit 76, and the second game state display provided in the collective display device 50. Segment 77, segment LED constituting the round display unit 60
Settings related to driving are performed.

As shown in FIG. 84, in the segment LED editing process, first, the blinking control timer is updated by +1 (step X581), and it is determined whether it is the output on timing depending on whether the specific bit of the blinking control timer is 1 or not. (Step X582). In this embodiment, when bit 5 of the blinking control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on, and a blinking cycle of 128 milliseconds is created.

When it is the output on timing (step X582; Y), the general figure hold number display table 1 is set out of the general figure hold number display tables 1 and 2 in which the display mode on the general figure hold indicator is defined. (Step X583), when the output is not on (Step X582; N)
Sets the usual figure hold number display table 2 (step X584). Then, the display data corresponding to the number of reserved general maps is acquired from the set general map hold number display table and saved in the segment area of the general map hold indicator (step X585). In the present embodiment, the number of pending orders is “0”.
As long as it is any one of “2”, the display data is the same regardless of which of the common figure hold number display tables is set.

Next, it is determined whether or not it is the output on timing (step X586). If it is the output on timing (step X586; Y), the number of the special figure 1 hold on which the display mode on the special figure 1 hold indicator is defined. Among the display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (step X587), and when it is not the output on timing (step X586; N), the special figure 1 hold number display table 2 is set ( Step X588). Then, display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number display table is acquired from the set special figure 1 hold number display table and saved in the segment area of the special figure 1 hold indicator (step X589).

Thereafter, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step X590). If it is the output on timing (step X590; Y), the special figure 2 hold number display in which the display mode on the special figure 2 hold indicator is defined. Of the tables 1 and 2, the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 is set (step X591), and if it is not the output on timing (step X590; N), the special figure 2 is displayed.
The hold number display table 2 is set (step X592). Then, display data corresponding to the special figure 2 holding number display table is acquired from the set special figure 2 holding number display table and saved in the segment area of the special figure 2 holding display (step X593).

Furthermore, a round display table in which the display mode in the round display section is defined (
In step X594, display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is acquired and saved in the segment area of the round display section (step X595).

Next, a second gaming state display unit 58 that lights up when a time-short state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time-short state.
The game state display table 1 in which the display mode is defined is set (step X596), display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired, and saved in the segment area of the first game state display unit (step X597). ). In the present embodiment, the first game state display unit composed of one LED is configured to be turned off during normal times and turned on during special drawing hours (during normal power support).

After that, the gaming state display table 2 is set in which the display mode in the second gaming state display unit for notifying that the gaming state is more advantageous than the left-handed (step X598).
), Display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired, saved in the segment area of the second game state display unit (step X599), and the segment LED editing process is terminated. In the present embodiment, the second game state display unit composed of one LED is turned off when the player is normally hit (left-handed), and when the player is right-handed (in the case of this embodiment, during the big hit, during the small hit, during normal power support) ) Is lit.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
FIG. 85 shows the magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113) in the timer interrupt process described above.
showed that. In this magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and fraud notification is set to start or end.

In this magnet fraud monitoring process, first, the third input port 12 is output from the magnetic sensor 61.
4 (input port 3), from the state of the detection signal taken in, it is determined whether the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch) is on, that is, abnormal magnetism is detected (step X611)
). If the magnet sensor is on (step X611; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that counts the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 to determine whether the timer has expired. Determination is made (step X613).

When the magnet fraud monitoring timer expires (step X613; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected for a certain period of time, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X
614), the magnet fraud notification timer initial value (here 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step X615). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step X616), and a magnet fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X6).
17) It is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step X613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, eight interruptions), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, when the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch) is not on (step X611; N)
That is, if no abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X618), and if the magnet fraud notification timer for specifying the magnet fraud notification time is not 0, -1 is updated (step X619). . The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step X620). Note that if the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not expired (step X613; N), the process proceeds to step X619.

If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (step X620; N), that is, if the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step X620; Y), that is, when the time is up or when the time has already expired, and when the fraud notification period has ended, If not, a command for terminating magnet fraud notification is prepared (step X621).
). Furthermore, a magnet fraud cancel flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X622).
Then, it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step X623).

When the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step X623; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step X623; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step X624), a production command setting process is performed (step X625), and the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. To do.

[Board radio fraud monitoring processing]
FIG. 86 shows the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step X114) in the timer interrupt process described above.
)showed that. In the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62, and fraud notification is started or stopped.

In this panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, the panel radio wave sensor 62 outputs the proximity I / F 12.
From the state of the detection signal taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via 1, it is determined whether the panel radio wave sensor 62 is on, that is, an abnormal radio wave is detected (step X631). When the panel radio wave sensor is on (step X631; Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (here 60000 ms) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step X632).

Then, a board radio fraud notification command is prepared (step X633), a board radio fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a board radio fraud flag (step X634), and the prepared board radio fraud flag is set to the value of the board radio fraud flag area. It is determined whether they match (step X639). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

On the other hand, when the panel radio wave sensor is not on (step X631; N), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is not detected, -1 is updated unless the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is 0 ( Step X635). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is 0 (step X63).
6).

If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (step X636; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is 0 (step X636; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and when the unauthorized notification period has ended, If not, a command to terminate board radio wave fraud notification is prepared (step X637), a board radio wave fraud cancel flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (step X638), and the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is set to the board radio wave. It is determined whether or not it matches the value of the illegal flag area (step X63).
9).

When the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step X639; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step X639; N), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (step X640), an effect command setting process is performed (step X641), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring The process ends.

[External information editing process]
FIG. 87 shows the external information editing process (step X115) in the timer interrupt process described above.
showed that. In the external information editing process, a payout command transmission process (step X105), a winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X108), and a magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113).
Processing to create information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device based on the monitoring result in the board radio wave fraud monitoring processing (step X114) and set it in the output buffer Etc.

In this external information editing process, it is first determined whether a glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701). If a glass frame opening error is not occurring (step X701; N), the main body frame (front frame 12) is determined. It is determined whether an open error is occurring (step X702).
If the body frame opening error is not occurring (step X702; N), the door / frame opening signal OFF data is saved in the external information output data area (step X703), and the security signal OFF data is stored in the external information. The output data area is saved (step X704), and the process proceeds to step X707.

On the other hand, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701; Y),
Front frame 12) If an open error is occurring (step X702; Y), the ON data of the door / frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X705), and the gaming machine error status signal Save ON data to test signal output data area (Step X706)
, The process proceeds to step X707. That is, information that the glass frame 14 and the front frame 12 are opened is output as external information.

Next, if the security signal control timer that counts a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is updated to −1 (step X707). ). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is 0
Is set to

If the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 (step X708; N),
That is, when the time has not expired, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and the process proceeds to step X711. As a result, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information. If the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step X708; Y), whether or not fraudulent radio waves are occurring, which is the detection of abnormal radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12. Is determined (step X709).

If the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step X709; Y), the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and the process proceeds to step X711. If no frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step X709; N), it is determined whether a switch abnormality error such as a switch connector disconnection is occurring (step X71).
1). If a switch abnormality error is not occurring (step X711; N), the process proceeds to step X713. If a switch error is occurring (Step X
711; Y) saves the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal in the test signal output data area (step X712), and proceeds to step X713.

Then, the magnet fraud is occurring (step X713; Y), the panel radio wave fraud is occurring (step X7).
14; Y), if at least one of the winning prize fraud is occurring (step X715; Y), the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step X718) and a gaming machine error state occurs. The signal ON data is saved in the test signal output data area (step X719), and the process proceeds to step X720. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information. In addition, when any error of steps X713 to X715 has not occurred, the off data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (
Step X717) and the process proceeds to Step X720.

Then, a start port 1 signal editing process for editing the winning signal to the first start winning port 36 (step X720), a start port 2 signal editing process for editing the winning signal to the normal variation winning device 37 (step X721), 2. Start port 3 signal editing process (step X722) for editing the winning signal to the start winning port 97 is performed. Next, a main prize ball signal editing process (step X723) for setting information relating to the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a symbol determination number signal editing process for setting information related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game is performed. (Step X724), the external information editing process is terminated.

[Starter 1 signal editing process]
FIG. 88 shows a start port 1 signal editing process (step X72) in the external information editing process described above.
0). In this starting port 1 signal editing process, first, the starting port 1 signal output control timer is set to 0.
Otherwise, -1 is updated (step X731). The minimum value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is set to 0. And it is determined whether the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732). When the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732; Y), it is determined whether the start port 1 signal output count is 0 (step X733).
).

If the number of times the start port 1 signal is output is not 0 (step X733; N), the start port 1
The signal output count is updated by -1 (step X734), and the start port 1 signal output control timer initial value is saved in the start port 1 signal output control timer area (step X735). The initial value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is a time obtained by adding the time (for example, 128 ms) of the start state (for example, high level) of the start port signal and the time (for example, 64 ms) of the off state (for example, low level). (For example, 192 ms). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the start port 1 signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X737), and the start port 1 signal editing process is terminated. Further, when the number of times of starting port 1 signal output is 0 (step X7
33; Y) saves off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X738), and ends the start port 1 signal editing process.

On the other hand, when the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is not 0 (step X732; N),
It is determined whether the start one-port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X736).
. Note that the fact that the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). When the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X736; Y), the process is performed in step X7.
37. Further, when the start port 1 signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step X736; N), the off data for turning off the start port 1 signal for the external device is set to RWM.
Is saved in the external information output data area (step X738), and the start port 1 signal editing process is terminated. Note that the start port 2 signal editing process in the external information editing process described above (step X7).
21) and the start port 3 signal editing process (step X722) are performed on the start port 2 signal and the start port 3 signal in the same manner as the start port 1 signal editing process.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
FIG. 89 shows the main prize ball signal editing process (step X7) in the external information editing process described above.
23). In the main prize ball signal editing process, a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning a prize opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10) is output to an external device. It is processing.

In the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X741). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742; Y), it is determined whether the number of main prize ball signal outputs is 0 (step X743).
).

If the main prize ball signal output count is not 0 (step X743; N), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by -1 (step X744), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area is output. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step X745). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is the ON state (for example, high level) of the main prize ball signal.
(Eg, 128 ms) and off-state (eg, low level) time (eg, 64 ms)
ms) is added (for example, 192 ms). Thereafter, on data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X
747), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated. If the main prize ball signal output count is 0 (step X743; Y), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S743). X748), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step X742; N), it is determined whether or not the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step X74).
6). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period (step X746; Y), the process proceeds to step X747. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step X746; N), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X748), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

[Design determination frequency signal editing process]
FIG. 90 shows the symbol determination number signal editing process (step X in the external information editing process described above).
724). The symbol determination number signal editing process is a process for controlling the output time of information related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game.

In this symbol determination frequency signal editing process, first, if the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not 0, −1 is updated (step X751). The minimum value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is 0 (step X752). When the value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is 0 (step X752; Y), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination number signal output count updated by +1 every time the special symbol variation display game is completed is 0. (Step X753).

If the symbol determination number signal output count is not 0 (step X753; N), the symbol determination count signal output count is updated by -1 (step X754), and the main winning ball signal is output to the symbol determination count signal output control timer area. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step X755). The initial value of the symbol determination count signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (128 ms in this case) of the symbol determination count signal (eg, high level) and the time (eg, 64 ms) of the off state (eg, low level). It is time (here 192 ms).

Thereafter, the ON data for turning on the symbol determination number signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X757), and the symbol determination number signal editing process is terminated. Also,
When the number of symbol determination times signal output is 0 (step X753; Y), the off data for turning off the symbol determination number signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X758). Then, the symbol determination number signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is not 0 (step X752; N)
Determines whether the symbol determination number signal output control timer is in the output on interval (step X
756). Note that the symbol fixed number signal output control timer is in the output on period means that the value of the symbol fixed number signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the symbol determination number signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X756; Y), the process proceeds to step X757. Further, when the symbol determination number signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step X756; N), off data for turning off the symbol determination number signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X74
8) The symbol determination number signal editing process is terminated.

Next, effects in the display device 41 will be described. As shown in FIG. 91 (a), in the center of the display area of the display device 41, there is provided a decoration special figure fluctuation display game display section 85 for displaying a decoration special figure fluctuation display game set as the main display symbol. Decoration special figure change display game display section 85
Then, after the identification information is variably displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variability display areas, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed by stopping display.

The decoration special figure fluctuation display game includes a decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and a decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. In the production control device 300, one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is set as the main display symbol, and the other is set as the sub display symbol. Whether the main display symbol is special figure 1 or special figure 2 can be set by the production control device 300 according to the state of the game, or can be set by the operation of the production button 25 by the player or the like. .

In the upper left part of the display area, there is provided a second decoration game display section 88 for displaying a decoration special figure variation display game set as a sub display symbol. The second decoration game display section 88 includes a special figure 1 second decoration game display section 88a that displays a decoration special figure 1 variation display game, and a special figure 2 second decoration game that displays a decoration special diagram 2 variation display game. A display unit 88b is provided, and it is possible to determine which special figure is set as the sub display symbol depending on the display position. The second decoration game displayed on each of the special decoration 1 second decoration game display section 88a and the special decoration 2 second decoration game display section 88b of the second decoration game display section 88 is a decoration special figure variable display game display section. As in the case of 85, the identification information is variably displayed in each of the left area, the middle area, and the right area, and then stopped and the result is displayed.

In FIG. 91 (a), for the purpose of explanation, it is shown that the special figure variation display game is displayed on both the special figure 1 second decoration game display section 88a and the special figure 2 second decoration game display section 88b. Actually, however, only the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure (special figure 2 in FIG. 91 (b)) set as the secondary display symbol as shown in FIG. 91 (b) corresponds to the display unit. Is displayed. Of course, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), the decoration special figure fluctuation display game of both special figures may always be displayed. The arrangement of the special figure 1 second decoration game display section 88a and the special figure 2 second decoration game display section 88b is not limited to the arrangement shown here, and may be any different position in the display area. Further, in the second decoration game display unit 88, the special figure 1 second decoration game display part 88a and the special figure 2 second decoration game display part 88b are different display parts. Of the display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, the decorative special figure variable display game set as the sub display symbol may be displayed.

Also, with respect to the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85, the display unit that displays the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the display unit that displays the decorative special figure 2 variable display game may be different display units. good. In addition, in the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 and the second decorative game display unit 88, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are not discriminated by the position of the display unit, but the color and shape of the identification information are specially specified. You may make it distinguishable by making it differ in FIG. 1 and special drawing 2. FIG. Further, information indicating which of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 may be displayed, or it may be discriminated by sound such as a background, a lamp, or BGM.

In addition, a memory display unit 83 for displaying a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory is provided at the lower center of the display area. The memory display unit 83 is provided with a first memory display unit 83a for displaying the first start memory and a second memory display unit 83b for displaying the second start memory. The decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the first memory display portion 83a has a one-to-one correspondence with the first start memory,
They are displayed side by side in the storage order, and here, there are three first start memories. The decoration special figure start memory display at the left end is a decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory stored first, and shifts to the left whenever digested.

Further, it is possible to suggest the result of pre-reading such as the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to each start memory by the display mode. In FIG. 91 (a),
A pre-reading effect for changing the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display is performed for the first start memory having the first digestion order. In addition, the second memory display unit 83b displays a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory one-on-one in the same manner as the first memory display unit 83a. Here, there are three second start memories.

On the left side of the first memory display unit 83a, there is provided a first in-execution memory display unit 84a that constitutes an in-execution storage display unit 84 that displays information related to the startup memory corresponding to the currently executed special figure 1 variable display game. It has been. In the first running memory display portion 84a, the special figure start memory display at the left end of the first memory display portion 83a is shifted to the executed special figure 1 at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game.
The result of the fluctuation display game, the fluctuation pattern, and the like are suggested by the display mode.

On the left side of the second memory display unit 83b, there is provided a second running memory display unit 84b that constitutes a running memory display unit 84 that displays information related to the startup memory corresponding to the currently executed special figure 2 variable display game. It has been. In this second running memory display portion 84b, the special figure start memory display at the left end of the second memory display portion 83b is shifted to the special figure 2 executed when the special figure 2 variable display game is started.
The result of the fluctuation display game, the fluctuation pattern, and the like are suggested by the display mode.

In the upper right part of the display area, a start memory number display unit 86 for displaying the start memory number is provided. The start memory number display section 86 includes a first start memory number display section 86a for displaying the number of first start memories.
And a second start memory number display portion 86b for displaying the number of second start memories.

FIGS. 91B to 91H show an example of display when the special figure variation display game is being executed. When the first start memory is digested and decreased from the state shown in FIG. 91 (a), FIG. 91 (b)
As shown in the figure, a display is performed in which the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the first memory display portion 83a flows into the first execution storage display portion 84a. Here, the result of the special figure variation display game, the variation pattern, and the like are suggested in the same manner as the pre-reading effect in the first running storage display portion 84a. In the starting memory number display unit 86, the numerical value of the first starting memory number display unit 86a decreases by one. Here, special figure 1 is set as the main display symbol, and special special figure fluctuation display game display unit 85 displays special special figure 1 fluctuation display game corresponding to special figure 1 fluctuation display game based on the first start memory. The identification information variation display is started in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas.

When the second start memory is digested and decreased from the state shown in FIG. 91 (a), FIG. 91 (b)
), The special figure start memory display at the left end of the second memory display portion 83b is displayed to flow into the second executing memory display portion 84b. Here, the result of the special figure variation display game, the variation pattern, and the like are not suggested in the second running storage display portion 84b. In the starting memory number display unit 86, the numerical value of the second starting memory number display unit 86b decreases by one. Also, here, special figure 2 is set as a sub-display symbol, and in the second decoration game display section 88, the special figure variation display game is displayed only on the special figure second decoration game display section 88b. 2 The decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game based on the second start memory is started in the second decoration game display section 88b, and the identification information is displayed in each of the left, middle and right fluctuation display areas. Fluctuation display is started.

As shown in FIG. 91 (c), in the decorative special figure fluctuation display game display unit 85, first, the identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area. In the temporary stop state, the identification information will appear to shake,
It is shown that it has not stopped completely. Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (d), the identification information temporarily stops in the right variation display area. In this case, the same identification information is stopped in the left variation display area and the right variation display area, and the reach effect is started. Of course, different identification information may be stopped in the left variation display area and the right variation display area and may not reach the reach state. In this manner, the first variation is until the right variation display area temporarily stops in the reach state, and the latter variation is thereafter.

Then, as shown in FIG. 91 (e), the identification information is temporarily stopped in the middle fluctuation display area, and the identification information is temporarily stopped in all the fluctuation display areas of the decorative special figure fluctuation display game display unit 85. Note that the temporarily stopped state is the same as that during the variable display, and here is the state during the variable display. Thereafter, when the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends, as shown in FIG. 91 (f), the identification information of the decorative special figure fluctuation display game display unit 85 is stopped, and the result mode is displayed.

Furthermore, with the end of the stop time of the special figure 1 variable display game, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game ends. Along with this, as shown in FIG. 91 (g), the display of the first running storage display unit 84a is erased, and the next decoration special figure 1 variable display game can be started. Then, as shown in FIG. 91 (h), the special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the new first start memory, and the corresponding special figure 1 variable display game is started in the decorative special figure fluctuation display game display unit 85. Is done.

Also, in the second decoration game display section 88, the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is executed in the same manner as the decoration special figure fluctuation display game display section 85. First, as shown in FIG. The identification information temporarily stops in the area, and the identification information temporarily stops in the right area as shown in FIG. 91 (d).
In the temporarily stopped state, the identification information is displayed so as to sway, indicating that it is not completely stopped.

Thereafter, the middle area is temporarily stopped, and the identification information is temporarily stopped in all the variable display areas of the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85. Note that the temporarily stopped state is equivalent to that during variable display. Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is over, as shown in FIG. 91 (e), the identification information of the decoration second decoration game display section 88 is stopped, and the result mode is displayed.

Furthermore, with the end of the stop time of the special figure 2 variable display game, the decorative special figure 2 variable display game ends. Along with this, as shown in FIG. 91 (f), the display of the second running storage display portion 84b is erased, and the next decoration special figure 2 variable display game can be started. Then, as shown in FIG. 91 (g), the special figure 2 variable display game is started based on the new second start memory, and the corresponding decorative special figure 2 variable display game is started in the second decorative game display unit 88. . The same process is performed when displaying the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 second decoration game display section 88a.

Because the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed independently and simultaneously,
The decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to these is also executed independently and simultaneously. If the result of one of the special figure variation display games is a special result (big hit or small hit), the other special figure fluctuation display game is forcibly terminated with the result of losing and enters a special game state. In this case, the decorative special figure fluctuation display game is also forcibly stopped, and the result of the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the main display symbol in the state of FIG. 91 (f) is the special result (big hit or small hit). If so, a special result is displayed on the decorative special figure change display game display unit 85, and the special special figure change display game on the second decorative game display unit 88 corresponding to the sub-display symbols ends with the result of the loss.

If the result of the special figure variation display game corresponding to the sub-display symbol in the state of FIG. 91 (e) is a special result (big hit or small hit), the special result is displayed on the second decoration game display unit 88, and the main result is displayed. The decorative special figure fluctuation display game display unit 85 corresponding to the display pattern has a decorative special figure fluctuation display game,
It ends with the result of the loss. In this case, after the special symbol variation display game corresponding to the sub display symbol is finished, the main display symbol and the sub display symbol are switched, and the special result displayed on the second ornament game display unit 88 is displayed as the special symbol variation display game. After being displayed on the display unit 85, a special gaming state is set. Thereby, it is made clear to the player that the special result has been derived. In this case, a skip effect may be performed as described with reference to FIG.

If there is no start memory corresponding to the sub-display symbol in the state of FIG. 91 (f), the special figure variation display game corresponding to the sub-display symbol is not executed, and the second decoration game display is performed until a new start memory is generated. The part 88 remains in a state displaying the result. Similarly, if there is no start memory corresponding to the main display symbol in the state of FIG. 91 (g), the special figure variation display game corresponding to the main display symbol is not executed. In this case, if the special figure variation display game corresponding to the sub display symbol is being executed, the main display symbol and the sub display symbol are switched.

As a result, the decoration special figure fluctuation display game being displayed on the second decoration game display unit 88 is displayed on the decoration special figure fluctuation display game display unit 85. Further, in the second decoration game display unit 88, the result displayed on the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85 corresponding to the special figure changed to the sub display symbol is displayed. That is, in a situation where only one special figure fluctuation display game is executed, the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed is set as a main display symbol. Of course, the decoration special figure change display game may be executed only by the decoration game display unit 88 without performing such a change. If there is no start memory corresponding to the main display symbol in the state of FIG. 91 (g) and the special figure variation display game corresponding to the sub-display symbol is not executed, the customer wait state is entered.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the main display symbol and the sub display symbol can be switched by pressing the effect button 25. FIG. 92 shows an example of display on the display device 41 when the main display symbol is changed based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player.

FIG. 92A shows a state in which the special figure 1 is the main display symbol, the special figure 2 is the sub display symbol, and the special figure variation display game is executed in both the main display symbol and the sub display symbol. . In the second decoration game display section 88, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed only on the special figure 2 second decoration game display section 88b.

When the player presses the effect button 25 in this state, the main display symbol and the sub display symbol are switched. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), the display of the decoration special figure variation display game display section 85 moves to the second decoration game display section 88, and the display of the second decoration game display section 88 changes to the decoration special figure. An effect of moving to the variable display game display unit 85 is performed, and the respective displays are switched as shown in FIG. In this case, since the special figure 1 becomes the sub-display symbol, the display of the special figure variation display game display unit 85 moves to the special figure 1 second decoration game display unit 88a. Also, since the special figure 2 becomes the main display symbol, the display of the special figure 2 second decoration game display section 88b moves to the decoration special figure fluctuation display game display section 85, and the special figure 2 second decoration game display section 88b displays the decoration. The special figure variation display game is not displayed.

In FIG. 92 (d), special figure 1 is the main display symbol and special figure 2 is the secondary display symbol, and the special figure variation display game is executed in both the primary display symbol and the secondary display symbol. It is a state, and the state where the reach effect is performed in the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is shown. When the effect button 25 is operated during the reach effect in this state, as shown in FIG. 92 (e), the display of the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 and the display of the second decorative game display unit 88 are performed. Are replaced, and the reach effect is not displayed as shown in FIG. 92 (f).

Thereafter, when the effect button 25 is operated again, as shown in FIG. 92 (g), the display of the decoration special figure change display game display section 85 and the display of the second decoration game display section 88 are switched. in this case,
Since the special figure 2 becomes the sub display symbol, the display of the special figure fluctuation display game display unit 85 moves to the special figure 2 second decoration game display unit 88b. Since special figure 1 becomes the main display symbol, the display of special figure 1 second decoration game display section 88a moves to decoration special figure fluctuation display game display section 85, and special figure 1 second decoration game display section 88a displays decoration. The special figure variation display game is not displayed. With this change, the reach effect is resumed as shown in FIG. 92 (h). In this case, the reach effect is not resumed from the point of interruption in FIG. 92 (e), but is resumed from the point corresponding to the progress of the special figure changing display game to be changed to the main display symbol.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 92 (d), a reach effect is performed, and the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed.
May be displayed on the display part of the corresponding special figure in the second decoration game display part 88. For example, in the case of FIG. 92 (d), since the main display symbol is special figure 1, the special special figure fluctuation display game is not displayed on the special special figure fluctuation display game display section 85 but on the special figure first fluctuation game display section 88a. You may display.

Also, when the right area is stopped on the second decoration game display section 88, the same identification information is stopped in the left area and the right area and the reach state is reached as shown in FIG. 92 (f). Although the display continues, the reach effect is not displayed. In this state, when the special display as the secondary display design is changed to the main display design, the corresponding reach effect is performed from the time of the change as shown in FIG. 92 (h).

As described above, the main display symbol and the sub-display symbol can be switched according to the player's intention, so that the display can be adapted to the player's preference and the interest of the game can be improved.

FIG. 93 shows an example of the skip effect. The skip effect is an effect that makes it appear as if the special figure variation display game has ended based on the operation of the effect button 25. As described above, when one special figure fluctuation display game ends with a special result while the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are being executed, the other special figure fluctuation display game is compulsory. In fact, it ends with the result of deviation. When such a forcible stop is performed, a skip effect is performed and the game is shown to have been forcibly stopped by a player's operation, thereby improving the interest of the game.

The state shown in FIG. 93 (a) is a state in which the main display symbol and the secondary display symbol are both running the special figure variation display game, and the secondary display symbol ends before the primary display symbol, and This is a state where the result of the sub-display symbol is a special result. Here, special figure 1 is the main display symbol and special figure 2 is the sub-display symbol, but the reverse is also possible. In this state, when the remaining variation time of the sub display symbols reaches a predetermined time, the skip effect is started. As shown in FIG. 93 (b), in the skip effect, an instruction display 94 for instructing pressing of the effect button 25 is performed, and a change in the remaining time during a period during which the effect button 25 can be operated (specific period) is visually displayed. In order to display the operation period display 93, which is a time bar in which the portion displayed in a specific color decreases with the passage of time.

When the effect button 25 is pressed, the main display symbol and the sub-display symbol are switched, and the identification information on the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85 is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 93 (c). It becomes. That is, in FIG. 93 (b), the second decoration game display section 88 (here, the special figure 2 second decoration game display section 88) corresponding to the special figure variation display game which is the sub display symbol.
The decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed in b) becomes a special special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the main display symbol in FIG. It will be in the state stopped temporarily in the result mode.

Thereby, it can be shown as if the special figure variation display game is ended based on the operation of the effect button 25. In addition, when the display of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game display unit 85 and the display of the second decoration game display unit 88 are switched, an effect indicating the state of movement as shown in FIG. 92 is not performed, so that FIG. It is possible to make it appear as if the decoration special figure fluctuation display game displayed on the decoration special figure fluctuation display game display unit 85 in FIG.

At the time of FIG. 93 (c), since the variation time of the special figure variation display game, which is a special result, has not ended, the identification information of the decoration special diagram variation display game display section 85 is temporarily stopped, and the sub display symbols and Since the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure has not been forcibly stopped yet, the second decoration game display section 88 (in this case, the special figure first decoration game display section 88a) continues to display the fluctuation display. .

Thereafter, when the variation time of the special figure variation display game, which is a special result, is ended, the identification information of the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85 is stopped as shown in FIG. Along with this,
The other special-figure display game is forcibly stopped by the result of disengagement, and the second decoration game display unit 88 displays the result of disengagement and stops. After this, a special gaming state is entered.

FIGS. 93 (e) to (h) show a case where the effect button 25 is not pressed in the skip effect. The skip effect ends before the end of the change time of the special figure change display game, which is a special result. With the end of the skip effect, as shown in FIG. The operation period display 93 ends, and a state in which the variable display is displayed is obtained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 93 (f), the special display variation corresponding to the special display variation display game of the main display symbol is completed until the variation time of the special display variation display game of the secondary display design that is a special result is finished. The decoration special figure fluctuation display game displayed on the display game display unit 85 is stopped by the result of the detachment.
At this time, in the special display variation display game display unit 85, as in the case of displaying the normal result of losing,
The identification information is stopped in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and it stops as if it had been scheduled to stop with the result of deviation from the beginning. In fact, the special display variation display game of the main display symbol is forcibly stopped due to the loss result when the variation time of the special display variation display game of the secondary display symbol that is a special result is over, but the forced stop is clearly It stops so that it may not show.

Thereafter, during the stoppage time of the special figure variation display game, as shown in FIG. 93 (g), the main display symbol and the sub display symbol are switched, and the display of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game display portion 85 and the second decoration game display portion 88 are displayed. Is switched, and the special result is displayed on the decorative special figure change display game display section 85 as shown in FIG. 93 (h), and the state shifts to the special game state.

Note that the main display symbol and the sub display symbol are both in a state in which the special figure variation display game is being executed, the sub display symbol is finished before the main display symbol, and the result of the sub display symbol is the special result. If the execution condition of the skip effect is not satisfied, the display as shown in FIGS. 93 (e) to 93 (h) is performed without performing the skip effect.

FIG. 94 shows a time chart when the skip effect shown in FIG. 93 is executed.
For the main display symbols and effects, the upper stage shows the case where the effect button 25 is pressed in the skip effect (FIGS. 93 (c) and (d)), and the lower stage does not have the effect button 25 pressed in the skip effect. The case (FIGS. 93 (e) to (h)) is shown.

Here, first, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are running,
The special figure 2 variable display game has a special result and ends before the special figure 1 variable display game. And the main variation symbol is a special diagram 1 variation display game, and the secondary variation symbol is a special diagram 2
When the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game that is a special result reaches a predetermined time in the state of the variation display game, the skip effect is started (t11). This predetermined time is 3000 ms which is the maximum execution time (t11 to t13) of the skip effect, and when the effect button is not pressed in the skip effect, the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85 stops the identification information by the deviation result. It is the time (4000 ms) that is combined with 1000 ms, which is the time (t13 to t14) required for the operation.

When the skip effect (specific period) is started, the press instruction effect for displaying the instruction display 94 and the operation period display 93 is started (t11, FIG. 93 (b)). Then, when the effect button 25 is pressed in the skip effect (t12), the main variation symbol and the sub variation symbol are switched, and the decoration special diagram variation display game display unit 85 corresponding to the main variation symbol is displayed. The game is temporarily stopped and the skip effect is ended (FIG. 93 (c)). The temporary stop state continues until the special figure 2 variable display game stops with a special result (t14).

After that, as the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped with a special result, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped even if the planned fluctuation time (until t17) has not been reached. (T14, FIG. 93 (d)). The decoration special figure fluctuation display game display unit 85 ends the temporarily stopped state, and stops displaying the identification information over the stop time of the special figure fluctuation display game (t14).
~ T16). Further, the second decoration game display unit 88 stops and displays the result of the deviation corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game that has become the sub-variation symbol. Then, the special gaming state is started with the end of the stop time (t16).

On the other hand, if the effect button 25 is not pressed in the skip effect, the skip effect (specific period) ends with the end of the maximum execution time of the skip effect (t13, FIG. 93 (e)), and the decorative special figure variation display. A variation effect for stopping the variation display of the game display unit 85 is performed (t1).
3-t14). In this variation effect, the identification information is stopped in the order of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region, as in the case of displaying the normal deviation result.

Then, with the start of the stop time of the special figure fluctuation display game, the decorative special figure fluctuation display game display section 8
5 is stopped and the special result is displayed on the second decoration game display section 88 (t
14, FIG. 93 (f)). Thereafter, the display of the decoration special figure variation display game display section 85 and the display of the second decoration game display section 88 are switched (t15, FIG. 93 (g)), and the special result stops in the decoration special figure variation display game display section 85. Is displayed, and the result of the shift is displayed on the second decoration game display unit 88. Then, the special gaming state is started with the end of the stop time (t16).
.

It should be noted that the time (t14 to t15) during which the shift result is stopped and displayed on the decoration special figure fluctuation display game display section 85 and the special result is displayed on the second decoration game display section 88 is shifted in the special figure fluctuation display game display section 85. If the time is the same as the time at which the result is displayed, the impression that the result was out of order can be given, and the interest when the result is shown to be special is improved. In addition, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that changes to a special result even when the special figure variation display game of the deviation result is actually finished.

In addition, in the skip effect, when the display of the decoration special figure change display game display unit 85 and the display of the second decoration game display unit 88 are switched, an effect indicating the state of movement as shown in FIG. 92 is not performed. However, an effect indicating the state of movement may be performed to indicate that the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the sub display symbol has stopped. Further, when the temporary stop is performed in response to the pressing of the effect button 25, the display of the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85 and the display of the second decoration game display unit 88 are not interchanged, and the decoration special diagram fluctuation display game display unit 85 It is also possible to temporarily stop the result of detachment, and then switch the display of the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85 and the display of the second decoration game display unit 88.

Also, as shown in FIG. 93 (c), after the special result is temporarily stopped in the decorative special figure fluctuation display game display unit 85, the fanfare effect at the start of the special game state is performed before the special figure fluctuation display game ends. May be. In this case, the temporary stop time may be the same as the stop time when the result of the special figure variation display game becomes a special result.

93 and 94 show the case where the result is a big hit, but the skip effect can be executed in the same manner when the result is a big hit. In this case, the result form displayed on the decoration special figure fluctuation display game display unit 85 as a result of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game that is a small hit may be a result aspect indicating the small hit, It is good also as a result aspect which shows deviation.

[Main processing]
In order to control the display on the display device 41 as described above, a main process shown in FIG. 95 and a timer interrupt process (not shown) are performed by the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control apparatus 300. In the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initially set (
Step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and an interrupt is permitted (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag or the like is cleared.

After the processing at the start of the program from steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, a WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is performed. Reading of the input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is performed in the timer interruption process, and in this effect button input process, processing when there is an input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is performed.

And setting of changeable range such as brightness and volume of LED and liquid crystal, and LED by player
And hall / player setting mode processing for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the liquid crystal (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) is performed to update a random number that determines details of the variation mode of the decoration special figure variation display game.

Next, a received command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to a command from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display edit process (step C13) for editing settings and control for drawing commands. ) To set the end of drawing command preparation (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the contents to be drawn, and so on until the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If drawing data of a screen to be drawn within 0 second (about 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is a frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to make a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 second), V blank interruption (1/6
If 0 second) is entered twice, it is determined that it is the frame switching timing. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 seconds, or image updating (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. Switching). If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

Thereafter, a sound control process (step C17) for performing control related to the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process (step C17) for controlling LEDs of the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the like. C18), a movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board rendering device 44 is performed. Then, the skip effect process for performing the process related to the skip effect is performed (step C19), the display switching process for switching the main variation symbol and the sub variation symbol is performed (step C20), and the process of clearing the WDT (step C8). Return.

[Skip effect processing]
FIG. 96 shows the skip effect process (step C19) in the main process described above. In this skip effect process, first, it is determined whether there is a skip effect flag that is set during execution of the skip effect (step C41). When there is a skip effect flag (step C41; Y), that is, when the skip effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step C49.
Further, when there is no skip effect flag (step C41; N), is it changing simultaneously,
That is, it is determined whether both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in variable display (step C42).

If not simultaneously changing (step C42; N), the skip effect process ends. In this case, the skip effect is not set. In the case of simultaneous change (step C42; Y
) Determines whether the sub-display symbol is a win (step C43). Here, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game of the special figure currently set as the sub display symbol is a win. The hit includes both big hits and small hits, but only one of them may be used.

If the sub-display symbol is not successful (step C43; N), the skip effect process is terminated. If the sub display symbol is a win (step C43; Y), it is determined whether the sub display symbol is stopped first (step C44). Here, the remaining variation time of the special variation display game of the special variation of the main variation symbol and the remaining variation time of the special variation variation display game of the special variation of the sub variation symbol are compared, and the special variation of the special variation of the special variation symbol is displayed. It is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time of the figure fluctuation display game is shorter.
That is, it is determined whether the special figure fluctuation display game of the special figure of the sub-variation symbol as the winning is finished first and the special figure fluctuation display game of the special figure of the main fluctuation symbol is forcibly stopped by the result of the disengagement.

When the sub display symbol does not stop first (step C44; N), the skip effect process is terminated. When the sub display symbol stops first (step C44; Y), it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time is a predetermined time (step C45). Here, it is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is a predetermined time by referring to the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game of the special figure of the sub fluctuation symbol. As shown in FIG. 94, the predetermined time is the maximum execution time of the skip effect (t1 in FIG. 94).
1 to t13), and the time required to stop the identification information as a result of the shift in the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 when the effect button is not pressed in the skip effect (t13 in FIG. 94). t14) 1000 ms and the total time (4000)
ms).

If the remaining fluctuation time is not the predetermined time (step C45; N), the skip effect process is terminated. If the remaining fluctuation time is a predetermined time (step C45; Y), a skip effect is set (step C46). Thereby, the press instruction effect for displaying the instruction display 94 and the operation period display 93 is started. Next, a skip effect flag is set (step C
47) An initial value is set in the skip effect timer (step C48). The initial value set here is a value corresponding to the maximum execution time of skip production (t11 to t13 in FIG. 94).

Thereafter, if the skip effect timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step C49), and it is determined whether the skip effect timer has become 0 (step C50). If the skip effect timer is not 0 (step C50; N), the skip effect process is terminated. When the skip effect timer reaches 0 (step C50; Y), that is, when the maximum execution time has elapsed without the effect button 25 being pressed in the skip effect, the skip effect is terminated (step C51). The skip effect flag is cleared (step C52), and the skip effect process ends.

[Display switching process]
FIG. 97 shows the display switching process (step C20) in the main process described above. In this display switching process, it is first determined whether or not there has been a switching operation between the main display symbol and the sub-display symbol (
Step C61). Here, the switching operation is a single press of the effect button 25, but the operation mode of the switching operation can be arbitrarily set. It is also possible to operate the touch panel 29.

If there is a switching operation (step C61; N), it is determined whether simultaneous fluctuation is occurring, that is, whether both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are being varied (step). C62).

If not simultaneously changing (step C62; N), the display switching process is terminated. If simultaneous change is occurring (step C62; Y), it is determined whether there is a switching permission flag (step C63). The switching permission flag is a flag that is set in a state in which switching between the main display symbol and the sub display symbol is possible according to the switching operation. If there is no switching permission flag (step C63; N), the display switching process is terminated. If there is a switching permission flag (step C63; Y), it is determined whether there is a skip effect flag set during execution of the skip effect (step C64).

If there is no skip effect flag (step C64; N), the main display symbol is changed (step C70), the effect at the time of switching is set (step C71), and the display switching process is terminated.
Thereby, the main display symbol and the sub display symbol are switched, and an effect at the time of switching as shown in FIG. 92 is performed.

On the other hand, when there is a skip effect flag (step C64; Y), that is, when the skip effect is being executed, the main display symbol is changed and the changed main display symbol is temporarily stopped (step C65). As a result, as shown in FIG. 93 (c), the decorative special figure change display displayed on the second decorative game display unit 88 corresponding to the special figure change display game of the special figure which has been set as the sub display symbol. While the game is displayed on the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85, the result is temporarily stopped.

Thereafter, the switching permission flag is cleared (step C66), the skip effect flag is cleared (step C67), the skip effect timer is cleared (step C68), and the display switching process is terminated. By clearing the switching permission flag, it is possible to maintain a state in which the result is temporarily stopped in the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85, and to make it appear as if the game is finished and the result mode is displayed. Also, the skip effect ends by clearing the skip effect flag and the skip effect timer. The switching permission flag is set again at the start of a new special figure variation display game.

If there is no switching operation (step C61; N), it is determined whether the switching condition is satisfied (step C69). The switching condition here is when the special display variation display game of the main display symbol is not executed and only the special display variation display game of the secondary display symbol is executed, or the special display variation display of the secondary display symbol For example, establishment of conditions regarding the progress of the game such as when the game has a special result. Needless to say, other conditions may be used, for example, a case where a reach state is reached only with a sub-display symbol. When this switching condition is not satisfied (step C6
9; N) terminates the display switching process. If the switching condition is satisfied (step C69)
; Y) changes the main display symbol (step C70), sets the effect at the time of switching (step C71), and ends the display switching process.

In the skip effect process shown in FIG. 96, steps C42 to C45 are given as conditions for setting the skip effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, you may make it perform the lottery of whether to perform skip production. Further, the condition for setting the skip effect may be that the reach effect or the specific effect is not executed in the decorative special symbol change display game corresponding to the main change symbol. Further, when one of the main variation symbol and the sub-variation symbol is a win, the skip effect may be performed by forcibly changing the winning special symbol to the sub-variation symbol.

Further, the present invention is not limited to the case where the secondary display symbol is a win, and the skip effect may be executable when the main display symbol is a win and stops before the secondary display symbol. In this case, the skip effect may be performed even if the result of the main display symbol is out of place, or the skip effect may be executable when a variation pattern without reach is selected. In skip production,
Although the result is temporarily stopped in response to the operation of the effect button 25, the identification information may be sequentially stopped within a predetermined time corresponding to the operation of the effect button 25. That is, it may be an effect as if the variation time was shortened.

In addition, basically, the main display symbol and the sub display symbol can always be switched, but may be switched only when the skip effect is executed. In addition, the setting of the main display symbol can be arbitrarily determined. For example, when the power supply with the RAM clear is turned on, the special display 1 is used. However, if the special figure 2 starts to be changed after that, only the special figure 2 is changed, so that the main display symbol is changed to the special figure 2. In addition, after the special game state is ended, a special figure derived from a special result that triggered the execution of the special game state is set as a main display symbol.

Further, when the reach state is started in the decoration special figure variation display game of the second decoration game display unit 88, the main variation symbol and the sub variation symbol may be automatically switched. In this case, it is good also as conditions which replace that the decoration special figure fluctuation display game of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game display part 85 is not a reach state. Alternatively, the main display symbol and the sub-display symbol may be compared with each other, and the one that is more likely to have a special result may be set as the main display symbol. In this case, if one of them has a special result, the special figure fluctuation display game that will be the special result regardless of the fluctuation pattern may be used as the main display symbol, or the special figure fluctuation display that will be the special result. Execution of the skip effect may be possible with the game as a sub-display symbol.

Moreover, the display mode in the display device 41 is not limited to the above-described one. For example, in the present embodiment, the display of the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 corresponding to the main display symbol is displayed larger than the display of the second decoration game display unit 88 corresponding to the sub display symbol. (A)
As shown in FIG. 5, both of them may be displayed in the same size, or the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the sub display symbol may not be displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), a decoration special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the main display symbol and a decoration special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the sub display symbol may be displayed in an overlapping manner. In this case, a part may be overlapped, or the whole may be overlapped. Also, the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the main display symbol is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the sub display symbol.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), the color of the identification information of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the main display symbol is different from the color of the identification information of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the sub display symbol. It is also good. Here, the color of the identification information of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the sub-display pattern located behind is made lighter than the color of the identification information of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the main display pattern. In addition, the identification information itself may be different between the main display symbol and the sub-display symbol.

In addition, although the reach effect is performed only for the special display variation display game corresponding to the main display symbol, when both the main display symbol and the sub display symbol are reached, the reach effect of both is displayed. You may make it do. In this case, as shown in FIG. 98C, the screen may be divided so that the reach effect can be executed on both sides, or both reach effects may be displayed in an overlapping manner.

Alternatively, both reach productions may be integrated to show the results of both special figure variation display games in the production of one story. For example, as shown in FIGS. 98 (d) to 98 (g), in battle effects for fighting against enemy characters, the battle results are derived in accordance with the derivation of the results of the respective special map variation display games. You may make it show a result.

As shown in FIG. 98 (d), a reach effect that integrates both reach effects is started based on the reach state in both special figure variation display games. Here, it is a case where the special figure variation display game of the main display symbol is finished first, and in FIG. 98 (d), a battle corresponding to this special figure variation display game is started as the first game, and FIG. 98 (e). The results are displayed as shown in The result of the special figure variation display game is a disappointing result, and the result of the battle is a draw.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 98 (f), a battle corresponding to the special display variation display game of the sub-display symbols is started as the second game, and the result is displayed as shown in FIG. 98 (g). The result of the special figure variation display game is a special result, and the result of the battle is the victory of the teammate character. Such an effect is not limited to the case where both are in the reach state, and can be executed even when one or both are not in the reach state. In the example shown in FIGS. 98 (a) to 98 (g), the display parts of the special figure variation display game display unit 85 and the second decoration game display unit 88 are different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 in FIG. However, it may be different or not different.

Based on the above, when a variable display game that displays the identification information in a variable manner based on winning at the start winning opening is executed and the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is obtained. The generated gaming machine includes a first start prize port 36 and a second start prize port (ordinary variable prize device 37, second start prize port 97) as start prize holes. First variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a first variation display game as a variation display game based on a winning game ball, and variation display based on a winning game ball to the second start winning opening Second variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a second variation display game as a game, display device 41 capable of displaying effects related to the game, and effect control means for controlling the effect of the game ( Output control device 300), the first variation display game and the second variation display game can be executed at the same time, and the effect control means can display one variation display among the first variation display game and the second variation display game. The game is mainly displayed on the display device 41, and based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the mainly displayed variable display game can be changed. Therefore, the special figure variation display game that the player mainly displays in the gaming machine capable of executing different special figure variation display games at the same time can be selected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Here, as the establishment of the predetermined condition, in addition to the operation of the operation means (the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29) that can be operated by the player, the special display variation display game of the main display symbol is not executed and the secondary display is performed. For example, the condition relating to the progress of the game may be established, such as when only the special symbol variation display game is executed, or when the special display variation display game of the sub-display is a special result. Needless to say, other conditions may be used, for example, a case where a reach state is reached only with a sub-display symbol.

In addition, a distribution unit (winning device 90) is provided that alternately distributes the game balls that have flowed into the predetermined inflow port 91 to the first start winning port and the second starting winning port. Therefore, Special Figure 1
There is a high possibility that the variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are executed at the same time, and the interest of the game can be improved by selecting the special figure variable display game that is mainly displayed by the player.

The first variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) performs execution control by the second variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) when performing execution control of the first variation display game. When the second variation display game that has been turned into the special result, the first variation display game that is performing the execution control can be ended as a result other than the special result. The execution control means performs the execution control of the second fluctuation display game, and when the first fluctuation display game whose execution control is performed by the first fluctuation display game execution control means has a special result, The second variation display game performing the execution control can be ended as a result other than the special result, and the effect control means (the effect control device 300) can execute the first change display game. And the second variation display game are executed at the same time, and the result of the variation display game from which the result is derived first is a special result, the result is obtained from the variation display game from which the result is derived first. In a specific period set between a predetermined time before the timing at which the result is derived and the timing at which the result is derived, the variable display game that is mainly displayed can be changed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. Therefore, when the result of one special figure fluctuation display game is derived, the special figure fluctuation display game that is mainly displayed by the player can be selected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the production control means (production control device 300) sets the identification information corresponding to the variable display game to be mainly displayed after the change to the temporary stop state based on the establishment of the predetermined condition in the specific period. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect as if the special figure variation display game has been stopped based on the player's operation, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the change display game that is mainly displayed is changed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition in the specific period, the effect control unit (the effect control apparatus 300) displays the change display game mainly displayed at least until the end of the change display game. Will be prohibited. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect as if the special figure variation display game is stopped based on the player's operation,
The fun of gaming can be improved.

Next, the output mode of the symbol determination signal will be described. The symbol confirmation signal is output to an external device outside the gaming machine 10 when the variation display of the special symbol variation display game is stopped. The external device can grasp that the special figure variation display game is stopped and the result is derived based on the symbol confirmation signal.

FIG. 99 shows an example of an output mode of the symbol determination signal. As shown in FIG. 99 (a), based on the fact that the special figure 1 variable display game changes from being variably displayed to being in a stopped state, the output of the symbol determination signal is started (t31). Here, since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is an outlier result, 600 ms is set as the stop time (t31 to t34). Note that the stop time of the special figure fluctuation display game is 600 ms in the case of a loss, in the case of a big hit, if either the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not a high probability final fluctuation. The display time is set to 2000 ms and 600 ms for the small hit. In the case of a high probability final variation, a display time of 2000 ms is set regardless of the result.

The symbol confirmation signal is turned on when the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped (t31),
After continuing the ON state for 128 ms, it becomes the OFF state (t32). And 64
The output ends after continuing the OFF state for ms (t33). After output is finished OF
The F state continues. The time required to output the symbol determination signal once is 192 ms, and the output is completed within the stop time regardless of the time selected as the stop time of the special figure variation display game.

Similarly, when the special figure 2 variable display game changes from the variable display state to the stop state, the symbol determination signal starts to be output based on the stop state (t35). Also in this case, the symbol determination signal is turned on with the suspension of the special figure 2 variable display game (t35), 1
After continuing the ON state for 28 ms, it becomes the OFF state (t36). And 64m
The output ends after the OFF state is continued for s (t37). OFF after output is finished
The state continues.

FIG. 99 (b) shows a case where the other special figure variation display game is stopped during the output of the symbol determination signal for the special figure variation display game previously stopped. In this example, both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are running, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is stopped first (t41). Based on this, a symbol determination signal is output (t41 to t44). The special figure 2 fluctuation display game is stopped during the output of the symbol confirmation signal (t42). In this case, Special Figure 1
Since the symbol confirmation signal for the variable display game is being output, the symbol determination signal for the special figure 2 variable display game is in a standby state. When the output of the symbol confirmation signal for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is finished, the output of the symbol confirmation signal for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started (t44). The symbol determination signal will be output twice in succession. However, since one symbol determination signal has an OFF state period (for example, t43 to t44), the external device outputs two symbol determination signals. Each can be detected independently.

In addition, although the case where the special figure 1 fluctuation | variation display game stopped previously was shown here, it is the same also when the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation display game stops previously. Further, when the other special figure variation display game is stopped during the period of the OFF state (for example, t43 to t44) while the symbol determination signal is being output, the O
Output of a new symbol determination signal is started after the end of the FF state period.

In FIG. 99 (c), the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are executed at the same time, and a special result is derived from one special figure fluctuation display game. The case where the display game was forcibly stopped due to the result of losing was shown. In this case as well, two symbol confirmation signals are continuously output.

In this example, both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are running, and a special result is derived in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (t51). Based on this, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped by the result of losing (t51). The result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit with a special result, and 2000 ms is set as the stop time (t51 to t5).
7) After this stop time is over, the special gaming state is started (from t57). In addition, since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is an outlier result, 600 ms is set as the stop time (
t51-t56).

The symbol determination signal is output for the first time based on the suspension of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game (t51). Then, when the output of the first symbol determination signal is completed, the second output is started (t53). The output of the two symbol determination signals ends within the stop time of the special figure 2 variable display game that has a special result. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the symbol determination signal from being output during the special game state, and to prevent the external device from grasping as if the special symbol variation display game has been stopped during the special game state.

For external devices, it is possible to output one jackpot signal, two jackpot signals, three jackpot signals and four jackpot signals as external information relating to the special gaming state. One big hit signal is output during the first special gaming state based on the big hit and the second special gaming state based on the small hits 1 to 4 (O
N state). The jackpot 2 signal is output during the first special game state and is not output during the second special game state. However, it is turned OFF in the first special gaming state based on the 2R probability variation D1 occurring in the low probability state. The big hit 2 signal is also output when the normal variable winning device 37 is in a short-time operation state (under normal power support). That is, the specific information output when the game state is the specific game state. In this case, the specific gaming state is a high probability state and a short time state, but only one of them may be generated. Even in this case, two jackpot signals are output during the specific gaming state. Also good.

The jackpot 3 signals are output during the first special gaming state and are not output during the second special gaming state. It is turned OFF when the first special gaming state is based on the 2R probability variation D1 occurring in the high probability state. The big hit 4 signal is not output during the first special gaming state and is output during the second special gaming state. The external device grasps the presence / absence or type of the special gaming state and the presence / absence of the short-time state on the basis of one jackpot signal, two jackpot signals, three jackpot signals and four jackpot signals, and displays information.

In this example, a special result is derived in a state that is not a short-time state, and a special gaming state is started. Before the special gaming state starts, the jackpots 1 to 4 signals are in the OFF state, and the special gaming state is started. At the same time, the big hit 1-4 signal is turned on (t57). Based on this, it is possible to grasp that the external device is in the special game state. Therefore, the output of the symbol determination signal is terminated before the external device is recognized as being in the special gaming state by any one of the big hits 1 to 4 signals. In other words, it can be said that the external device waits for the output of information (a jackpot 1 to 4 signals) for grasping that the external device is in the special gaming state until the output of the symbol determination signal is completed.

Note that the external device determines that the special figure variation display game has been stopped and the result has been derived based on the change of the symbol determination signal to the ON state (rising edge of the signal), so that at least the second symbol determination signal is ON. The change to (t53) may be performed before the external device is recognized as being in the special gaming state by either the stop time or the jackpot signals 1 to 4.

FIG. 100 shows an output mode of information output to the outside at the end of the time saving state.
The gaming machine of the present embodiment is in a high probability state and a short time state from the end of the special gaming state to the 50th special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 100 (a), the special figure variation display game is the 49th special figure variation display game in the state where the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed as the 48th special figure variation display game from the end of the special game state. A one-variable display game is started (t61). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started as the special figure fluctuation display game for the 50th time (t62).

Here, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed simultaneously as in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the probability state is set to a low probability at the end of the 50th special figure variable display game. If the state is changed to the state, the determination is made in the high probability state even to the other special figure fluctuation display game started during the execution of the one special figure fluctuation display game, and the probability is high over 50 times. The game can be executed in the state. Therefore, as in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the special figure 1
If the variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed simultaneously, after the 50th special figure variable display game is determined in a high probability state, the probability is low until the start of the next special figure variable display game. Here, it is necessary to change the state to the low-probability state immediately after the start processing for the 50th special figure variation display game is completed (t62).

With the end of the high probability state and the short time state, the test signal indicating the gaming state changes from the ON state to the O state.
The FF state is entered, and a state indicating a low probability state and a state without time reduction is obtained (t62). Specifically, special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, special symbol 1
The variation time shortening state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is set to OFF.
The test signal is for enabling the game state to be grasped by the test firing test apparatus when testing the gaming machine, and the output state is changed in accordance with a change in the actual game state.

On the other hand, the jackpot 2 signal that can be turned on in the short-time state or the special gaming state is kept on until the end of the 50th special figure variation display game, and then OF
The F state is set (t64). The jackpot 1 to 4 signals are for enabling the collection and display of information relating to the game in an external device provided in the game store, and are in an output mode suitable for display on the external device.

An information display device provided above the gaming machine as one of the external devices displays information such as the number of executions of the special figure variation display game and the number of derivations of the special result based on the jackpot 1-4 signal, the symbol confirmation signal, etc. I am doing so. In this information display device, a hit in a state that is not in the time-short state is set as the initial hit, and the time-short state including the initial hit is terminated by execution of the special-figure variable display game a predetermined number of times and becomes a normal game state. It is possible to display the number of big hits as the number of consecutive resorts, but it is more convenient for the display of the number of consecutive resorts to keep the ON state until the end of the 50th special figure variation display game, which is a predetermined number of big hits Is good.

FIG. 100 (b) shows a case where the 50th special figure variation display game has a special result.
From the end of the special gaming state until the 50th special figure variation display game is started, the gaming state is a high probability state and a short time state (t72). In this state, the jackpot 2 signal is turned on to indicate that the time is short, and the test signal is also turned on to indicate a high probability state and a time short state. The jackpot 1, 3, 4 signal that can be turned on during the special game state is in the off state.

Then, when the 50th special figure variation display game is started, the gaming state is set to a low probability state and a state without time reduction (t72). Along with this, the test signal is turned off, but the two jackpot signals are kept on. While the 50th special figure fluctuation display game is being executed, the 51st special figure fluctuation display game is started (t73), and this special figure fluctuation display game is determined in a low probability state.

Thereafter, a special result is derived in the 50th special figure variation display game (t74). Along with the derivation of this special result, the 51st special figure fluctuation display game, which is the other special figure fluctuation display game, is forcibly stopped with the result of losing. In addition, as the special result is derived in the 50th special figure fluctuation display game, the 50th special figure fluctuation display game and the forcibly stopped 51
A symbol determination signal corresponding to the second special symbol variation display game is output (t74, t75).

The external device grasps the stoppage of the special figure variation display game based on the symbol determination signal and determines that the special figure fluctuation display game is stopped in the short time state because the big hit 2 signal is in the ON state. Thereafter, as the special gaming state starts, the jackpot 1, 3, and 4 signals are turned on, and therefore it is understood that the special gaming state is started also in the external device. At this time, as described above, it is determined that the special figure variation display game that has been completed just before is in the short-time state. Therefore, it is determined that the current big hit is a consecutive big hit and the number of extended times is added. To do.

During the execution of the 50th special figure fluctuation display game, an effect indicating that it was the last special figure fluctuation display game in a high probability state was also performed, and a big hit occurred in this special figure fluctuation display game. In some cases, it is normal for the player to recognize that it is a big hit, and the player's recognition can be matched with the display on the information display device. If the two jackpot signals change according to the gaming state in the same manner as the test signal, the information display device is in a state indicating that there is no time reduction at the end of the 50th special figure variation display game. In this case, the display is made as the first hit, and the display is different from the player's recognition, which reduces the interest of the game.

It should be noted that by changing the big hit 2 signal as in the present embodiment, in the example of FIG. 100 (b), the special figure fluctuation display game (here, 4 is terminated during the execution of the 50th special figure fluctuation display game).
Even when the 9th special figure variation display game) has a special result, it can be treated as a consecutive resort big hit. Also in the production control device 300, the 50th special figure fluctuation display game and 5
For the special figure fluctuation display game that is finished during the execution of the 0th special figure fluctuation display game, if the result is a special result, it is handled as a consecutive resort big hit.

Based on the above, when a variable display game that displays the identification information in a variable manner based on winning at the start winning opening is executed and the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is obtained. The generated gaming machine includes a first start prize port 36 and a second start prize port (ordinary variable prize device 37, second start prize port 97) as a start prize port.
First variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) capable of executing the first variation display game as a variation display game based on the winning of the game ball to the game, and based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening A second variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) capable of executing the second variation display game as the variation display game; and an output means (game control device 100) for outputting information to the outside of the gaming machine. The first variation display game and the second variation display game can be executed at the same time, and the first variation display game execution control means executes the second variation display game when the execution control of the first variation display game is performed. When the second variation display game whose execution control is performed by the control means has a special result, the first variation display game performing the execution control is stopped as a result other than the special result. The second variation display game execution control means is controlled by the first variation display game execution control means when executing the second variation display game execution control. When the first variable display game has a special result, forcible stop control is possible to stop the second variable display game performing the execution control as a result other than the special result. When the stop information can be output to the outside in response to the stop, and the forced stop control is performed, the first variation display game and the second game before the start of the special game state based on the derivation of the special result The stop information corresponding to each of the variable display games is output. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent inconvenience in grasping information in the external device.

In addition, the game apparatus includes specific game state generation means (game control device 100) for generating a specific game state over a period until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed after completion of the special game state, and the output means is in the specific game state. In this case, the specific information can be output to the outside, and the specific gaming state generating means ends the specific gaming state with the start of the variable display game that is the predetermined number of times, and the output means is the variable display game that is the predetermined number of times This means that the output of the specific information is terminated. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent inconvenience in grasping information in the external device.

In the above-described embodiment, the high-probability state and the short-time state are ended at the start of the 50th special-figure display game, but the high-probability state ends at the start of the 50th special-figure display game. The state may end at the end of the 50th special figure variation display game. And the big hit 2 signal which makes specific information may be made into an ON state in a time reduction state, and may be made into an OFF state in a state without time reduction. Even in this way, as shown in FIG. 100, the special map variation display game that ends during the execution of the 50th special map variation display game or the 50th special map variation display game in the external device is special. Even if it becomes a result, it becomes possible to treat it as a Renso jackpot.

That is, the normal variation winning device 37 and the normal variation winning device 37 that can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball is difficult or impossible to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easier to win or can win than the closed state. Operation control means (game control device 100) for controlling the operation state in any one of a normal operation state and a short-time operation state in which a winning is easier than the normal operation state, and after the special game state ends Specific game state generating means (game control device 100) for generating a specific game state over a period until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed, and a period until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed after the end of the special game state A probability setting means capable of setting a high probability state in which the probability that the result of the variable display game is a special result is higher than the normal probability state;
The probability setting means sets a high probability state with the start of the specific game state and shifts to the normal probability state with the start of the predetermined number of variable display games, whereas the motion control means has the specific game state Control in the short-time operation state may be started with the start of the state, and the transition to the normal operation state may be made based on the end of the predetermined number of variable display games that will end the specific gaming state.

Next, the out number error monitoring based on the detection of the game ball by the out switch 98 will be described. The out switch 98 is a sensor that detects a safe ball that has been won at each winning opening and an out ball that is discharged from the out opening 30a without winning at each winning opening. That is, all the game balls that have been launched into the game area 32 and finished the game are detected. Based on the number of game balls detected by the out switch 98 and the number of game balls detected at each winning opening, an out number error is monitored.

Specifically, it is determined that an out number error has occurred when the number of game balls detected at each winning opening is greater than a predetermined number than the number of game balls detected by the out switch 98. The number of game balls detected by the out switch 98 is the total number of out balls and safe balls, and the number of game balls detected at each winning opening is the number of safe balls. Therefore, normally, the number of game balls detected at each winning opening rarely exceeds the number of game balls detected by the out switch 98, and if it exceeds, it is assumed that there is an abnormality. However, it is also assumed that the detection number of game balls at each winning opening exceeds the detection number of game balls at the out switch 98 due to the detection timing and the reset timing of the counter that holds the detection number. When the number exceeds a predetermined number, it is determined that an out number error has occurred.

As a case where such an out-number error occurs, an illegal act by a thread fishing ball is assumed. The fraudulent act by the thread fishing ball is an act of illegally generating detection by the winning sensor by operating a thread by entering a game ball or a metal piece with a thread into a winning opening. When such an illegal act is performed, only the number of game balls detected at the winning opening is increased, so the out switch 98 is used.
There may be a situation where the number of detected game balls exceeds the limit.

[Status display edit output processing]
FIG. 101 shows a status display edit output process (step X1) in the timer interrupt process described above.
16). In this status display edit output process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the out switch (step X801). If there is no input to the out switch (Step X
801; N) moves to step X809. If there is an input to the out switch (step X801; Y), the value in the out counter area is loaded (step X802).
Then, the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X803), and it is determined whether it overflows (step X804).

If no overflow has occurred (step X804; N), the updated value is saved in the out counter area (step X805). Thereby, the game balls discharged from the gaming machine are counted and the counting result is held. That is, the game control device 100 forms a total discharge number counter (out counter) that counts the number detected by the discharge sensor (out switch 98). Thereafter, a difference calculation process for calculating a difference necessary for determining the out number error is performed (step X806), and the process proceeds to step X809.

When an overflow occurs (step X804; Y), the value of the difference counter area is saved in the total winning number counter area (step X807), and 0 is stored in the out counter area.
Is saved (step X808), and the process proceeds to step X809. The difference counter area is an area for storing the difference value calculated in the difference calculation process, and the total winning number counter area is an area for storing the total number of game balls won in each winning opening. When the value of the out counter area overflows, the values of the total winning number counter area and the out counter area are set as described above. Note that the value of the difference counter area is maintained. Thus, there is no inconvenience in detecting the out number error.

Thereafter, a base value calculation process is performed for calculating a base value from the number of game balls detected by the out switch 98 and the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area (step X809), and the out number error monitoring is performed to monitor the out number error. The process is performed (step X810), and the state display edit output process is terminated.

[Difference calculation process]
FIG. 102 shows the difference calculation processing (steps X365 and X806) in the above-described winning number counter updating processing and status display editing output processing. In this difference calculation process, first, the value of the out counter area is loaded (step X821), the value of the total winning number counter area is loaded (step X822), and the difference is calculated (step X823). In calculating the difference, a value obtained by subtracting the value of the out counter area from the value of the total winning number counter area is calculated and set as the difference. However, when the calculation result is less than 0, the calculated difference may be treated as 0.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the calculated difference is larger than the value in the difference counter area (step X824). When the calculated difference is larger than the value of the difference counter area (step X82)
4; Y) saves the difference calculated in the difference counter area (step X825), and ends the difference calculation process. If the calculated difference is not greater than the value in the difference counter area (step X824; N), the difference calculation process is terminated without saving the difference calculated in the difference counter area. Accordingly, the maximum value of the difference is held in the difference counter area. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a calculation unit that calculates a difference number in which the value of the total winning number counter exceeds the value of the total number-of-discharges counter, and a difference that can hold the difference number calculated by the calculation unit. Create a counter.

[Out number error monitoring processing]
FIG. 103 shows the out number error monitoring process (step X810) in the above-described state display editing output process. In this out number error monitoring process, first, the value of the difference counter area is loaded (step X841), and it is determined whether the value of the difference counter area is larger than the out number error occurrence determination number (here, 13) (step X842). ).

The out number error occurrence determination number can be set to an arbitrary value, but in consideration of a special game state in which consecutive winnings are most likely to occur, the number of winnings (for example, 1) that is a round end condition
It is preferable that the value is larger than 0), and it is preferable to set a value having a margin larger than the number of winning prizes which is a condition for ending the round in consideration of winning in other holes at the same time. In addition to this, it is preferable to set a value with a margin in consideration of the time from winning to detection by the out switch 98 and the possibility of false detection signal detection due to noise. In the present embodiment, the number of out-number errors occurrence determination is set to 13 in consideration of these.

When the value of the difference counter area is larger than the number of out-number errors occurrence determination (step X84)
2; Y), that is, when it is determined that an out number error has occurred, the value of the difference counter area is limited to the number of out number error occurrence determination (step X843), and an initial value (eg, 60000 ms) is stored in the out number error notification timer area. ) Is saved (step X844). Next, an out number error occurrence command is prepared (step X845), an out number error occurrence flag is prepared as an illegal flag (step X846), and the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value in the out number error occurrence flag area ( Step X853).

On the other hand, if the value of the difference counter area is not larger than the number of out-number error occurrence determination (step X842; N), that is, if no out-number error has occurred, -1 is updated unless the out-number error notification timer is 0. (Step X847). The minimum value of the out number error notification timer is set to zero.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the out number error notification timer is 0 (step X848),
If the value is not 0 (step X848; N), that is, if the time is not up,
The out number error monitoring process ends. If the value is 0 (step X848; Y)
In other words, if the time is up or has already expired, an out number error cancel command is prepared (step X849), and an out number error cancel flag is prepared as an illegal flag (step X850). And it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the out number error notification timer becomes 0 (step X851).

When it is the moment when the value of the out number error notification timer becomes 0 (step X851; Y)
That is, when the value of the out number error notification timer becomes 0 in the current out number error monitoring process, the value of the difference counter area is cleared (step X852), and the prepared illegal flag is set to the value of the out number error flag area. (Step X853). Also, when it is not the moment when the value of the out number error notification timer becomes 0 (step X851; N), that is, when the value of the out number error notification timer becomes 0 in the previous out number error monitoring process, preparation is performed. The illegal flag is compared with the value in the out number error flag area (step X853).

If the prepared illegal flag matches the value of the out number error flag area (step X853; Y), the out number error monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared illegal flag does not match the value of the out-number error flag area (step X853; N), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the out-number error flag area (step X854), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step X855), the out number error monitoring process is terminated. Through the above processing, the out number error notification command is generated when the out number error is generated.
The out number error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 3 along with the out number error cancellation.
Is transmitted to 00, and the start and end of out number error notification are set. That is, the game control device 100 receives a winning detection sensor (start port 1 switch 36a, start port 2 switch 3).
7a, start port 3 switch 97a, upper prize port switch 38a, lower prize port switch 39a
, And a control means for performing control based on detection signals from the winning prize switch 35a) and the discharge sensor (out switch 98).

FIG. 104 shows an example of a change in value in each counter area for detecting an out number error. The total winning number counter area, the out counter area, and the difference counter area are areas provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and are cleared when the power is turned on accompanied by the RAM clear, and values are shown as a1 in FIG. 104 (a). Set to zero. RAM
In the case of power-on without clearing, the value at the time of power-off is maintained, but even in this case, it may be cleared.

Then, the value of the total winning number counter is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from one of the winning openings (a2), and a difference is calculated accordingly. Here, since the value of the out counter area is 0, the difference is 1. Since the value is larger than 0, which is the value of the difference counter area before update, 1 is set in the difference counter area.

Thereafter, the value of the out counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the out switch 98 (a3). The out switch 98 also detects a safe ball that has won a winning opening, and normally, if the value of the total winning number counter is updated by +1 by winning a game ball, the game ball is detected by the out switch 98. The value of the out counter area is updated by +1. The difference is calculated as the value of the out counter area is updated. Here, since the value of the total winning number counter area and the value of the out counter area are both 1, the difference is 0, and the value of the difference counter area is updated because it is smaller than 1 which is the value of the difference counter area before the update. 1 is maintained instead.

Next, the value of the out counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the out switch 98 (a4). In this update, the out switch 98 detects the out ball discharged from the out port 30a without winning any of the winning ports. Although the difference is calculated with this update, the difference is −1 and is smaller than the value of the difference counter area before the update, so the value of the difference counter area is maintained.

Thereafter, the value of the total winning number counter area is continuously updated based on the detection signal from the winning opening (
a5 to a7). The difference is calculated each time this update is made, but the difference becomes 2 in a7 and becomes larger than 1 which is the value of the difference counter area before the update, so the value of the difference counter area is updated to 2. In this way, when only the value of the total winning number counter area increases, it may occur even in a state where a gaming ball has won a winning opening in a short time and has not yet been detected by the out switch 98 as in the special gaming state. In addition, there may be a case where only detection at a prize opening occurs due to an illegal act by a thread fishing ball. In this way, when the value of the total winning number counter area increases and the difference increases, and the difference value exceeds the out number error occurrence determination number (for example, 13), it is determined as an out number error.

FIG. 104B shows a case where an out number error occurs. In this example, first, the value of the total winning number counter area is 52, the value of the out counter area is 40, and the value of the difference counter area is 12 (b1). Then, the value of the total winning number counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the winning opening, and the value of the difference counter area becomes 13 (b2). Further, the value of the total winning number counter area is determined based on the detection signal from the winning opening. The value is updated by +1, and the value of the difference counter area becomes 14, which exceeds 13 that is the number of out error occurrence determination (b3
). As a result, it is determined that an out number error has occurred, and an out number error notification state in which an abnormality is notified is entered. The out number error notification state is continued for a predetermined time (here 60000 ms) from when it is determined that an out number error has occurred.

After it is determined that an out number error has occurred, the value of the difference counter area is changed to 13 which is the out number error occurrence determination number (b4). Here, the value of the total winning number counter area is further updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the winning opening thereafter (b5). The difference is calculated based on this update, and since it is larger than the value of the difference counter area before the update, the calculated difference value of 15 is set in the difference counter area. With this difference setting, it is determined that an out number error has occurred again, and the notification period of the out number error notification state is reset (extended).

After it is determined that an out number error has occurred, the value of the difference counter area is changed to 13 which is the out number error occurrence determination number (b6). Thereafter, the value of the out counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the out switch 98, and the difference is calculated. Here, the difference is also 14 and it is determined again that there is an out number error (b7).

In this way, after determining that the out number error has occurred, the value of the difference counter area is set as the out number error occurrence determination number, and by continuously monitoring the abnormality even during the notification period,
If it is determined that an out number error has occurred and a detection signal from the winning opening is further input, it can be immediately determined that there is an out number error. Furthermore, when it is determined that an out number error has occurred and a detection signal from the winning a prize is further input, the notification period is extended and it takes a long time to cancel the out number error. The out number error occurs when the number of detection signals from the winning award is abnormally large, and there is a high possibility that an illegal act is performed at the winning award. Even if this out number error occurs, if the detection signal from the winning opening is generated, there is a high possibility that fraud continues. In such a case, the fraudulent act is prevented from being continued by not easily releasing the out-number error notification state.

After it is determined that an out number error has occurred, the value of the difference counter area is changed to 13 which is the out number error occurrence determination number (b8). Thereafter, the value of the out counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the out switch 98, and the difference is calculated (b9).
. Here, the difference is 13, and it is not determined that an out number error has occurred.

Then, the state where it is not determined that an out number error has occurred continues, and when it is determined that an out number error has occurred at the end (b7), the out number error notification state is canceled and the notification period is finish. With the cancellation of the out-number error notification state, the value in the difference counter area is cleared to 0 (b10). However, the value of the total winning number counter area and the value of the out counter area are not cleared.

Thereafter, the difference is calculated when the detection signal from the winning opening or the detection signal from the out switch 98 is input. Here, the difference is calculated based on the detection signal input from the out switch 98, and the calculated difference of 9 is set in the difference counter area. Since the difference counter area is updated when the calculated difference number is larger than the held value, the difference counter area is not updated so as to decrease the value. For this reason, the value of the differential counter area is cleared along with the release of the out-number error notification state, and the abnormal state is once released reliably. Further, by clearing only the value of the difference counter area without clearing the value of the total winning number counter area or the value of the out counter area, the subsequent timing (b11
) Is reflected in the difference counter area. It should be noted that all of the value of the total winning number counter area, the value of the out counter area, and the value of the difference counter area may be cleared to 0 when the out number error notification state is canceled.

FIG. 104 (c) shows a case where the value in the out counter area overflows. The out-counter area of this embodiment can take a value of 0 to 255, and returns to 0 when +1 is updated in a state where the maximum value is 255. In this example,
The value of the out counter area is 254 (c1), and the detection signal from the out switch 98 is inputted, so that the value of the out counter area becomes the maximum value 255 (c2). From this state, a detection signal from the out switch 98 is further input, and the value in the out counter area overflows to 0 (c3). As the out counter area overflows, the value of the differential counter area is set to 5 in the total winning number counter area (d4). The value in the difference counter area is maintained as it is.

If the value of the total winning number counter area is maintained as it is when the value of the out counter area overflows, if the value of the total winning number counter area exceeds 13 which is the out number error occurrence determination number, it is immediately out It is determined that a number error has occurred, causing inconvenience. However, if the value of the total winning number counter area is also cleared and set to 0, the difference is also set to 0, resulting in inconvenience that the detection of the occurrence of the out number error is delayed. Therefore, by setting the value of the difference counter area as the value of the total winning number counter area, the state of the difference before the overflow occurs can be maintained, and the occurrence of the out number error can be continuously monitored before and after the overflow. ing.

FIG. 104 (d) shows a case where the value of the total winning number counter area overflows.
The total winning number counter area of the present embodiment can take a value of 0 to 255 as a value,
When +1 is updated in a state where the maximum value is 255, the value returns to 0. In this example, first, the value of the total winning number counter area is 254 (d1), and the detection signal from the winning opening is inputted, and the value of the total winning number counter area becomes 255 which is the maximum value (d2). From this state, a detection signal from the winning opening is further input, and the value of the total winning number counter area overflows to 0 (d3). As the total winning number counter area overflows, the value of the difference counter area is set to 5 in the total winning number counter area (d4). Further, the value of the difference counter area is maintained as it is, and the value of the out counter area is cleared and set to 0.

By doing this, just like when the value of the out counter area overflows,
The state of the difference before the overflow occurs is maintained, and the occurrence of the out number error can be monitored without change before and after the overflow.

As described above, a game area where a game ball can flow down in a gaming machine that generates a state advantageous to a player when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game becomes a special result. 32, and a winning area provided in the game area 32, in which a game ball can be won (first start winning port 36, normal variation winning device 37, second starting winning port 97, first special variable winning device 38, second
Special variable winning device 39, general winning port 35) and winning detection sensors (starting port 1 switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a, starting port 3 switch 9) capable of detecting the game balls won in the winning area.
7a, upper university prize opening switch 38a, lower university prize opening switch 39a, prize opening switch 35a)
And a discharge sensor (out switch 98) capable of detecting a game ball discharged from the game area 32
And a control means (game control device 100) that performs control based on detection signals from the winning detection sensor and the discharge sensor, and the control means counts the total winning number counter (game) that counts the number of detections by the winning detection sensor. The control device 100), the total discharge number counter (game control device 100) that counts the number detected by the discharge sensor, and the difference number that is the value that the total winning number counter value exceeds the total discharge number counter value. Calculating means (game control device 100) for determining that an abnormality has occurred when the number of differences exceeds a predetermined number. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect fraud.

The control means also includes a difference counter (game control device 100) that can hold the difference number calculated by the calculation means, and the difference counter has a maximum value of the calculated difference number until the difference number exceeds a predetermined number. When the total number-of-emissions counter is reset, the value of the difference counter is set in the total number-of-wins counter, and the value of the difference counter is held. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect fraud.

Further, the control means is configured to perform abnormality notification for notifying the occurrence of abnormality when the number of differences exceeds a predetermined number over a predetermined notification period, and resets the value of the difference counter at the end of the notification period Like to do. Therefore, the abnormal state is surely canceled with the end of the notification period.

Further, the control means keeps the values of the total winning number counter and the total number-of-discharges counter even if the difference counter value is reset at the end of the notification period. Therefore, the actual difference number is reflected in the difference counter after the notification period is over.

Further, the control means can calculate the difference number by the calculation means based on the updated value of the total winning number counter or the total discharge number counter, and can hold the difference number in the difference counter. When the number exceeds the predetermined number, the occurrence of the abnormality is notified, and based on the determination that the abnormality has occurred, the value of the difference counter is set to the predetermined number. Therefore, it becomes possible to immediately detect the abnormality again after detecting the abnormality, and it is possible to reliably detect the illegal act. In the above-described embodiment, the predetermined number set in the difference counter area based on the occurrence of abnormality is the out number error determination number, but other values may be used.

Further, the control means is configured to execute abnormality notification for notifying occurrence of abnormality over a predetermined notification period, and when the value of the total winning number counter or total discharge number counter is updated during the notification period, the calculation means Thus, the difference number can be calculated and the difference number can be held in the difference counter. Therefore, it becomes possible to immediately detect the abnormality again after detecting the abnormality, and it is possible to reliably detect the illegal act.

In addition, when the control means determines that an abnormality has occurred because the value of the difference counter exceeds a predetermined number during the notification period, the notification period is extended based on the determination. Therefore,
It is possible to prevent the fraudulent behavior from being continued by not easily terminating the abnormality notification. Here, the extension of the notification period may be performed by clearing the remaining notification period and setting a second notification period based on the occurrence of a new abnormality, or a predetermined notification period in addition to the remaining notification period. May be set. In addition, the time extended based on the occurrence of a new abnormality may be the same time regardless of the number of times the extension is performed, or may be different depending on the number of times the extension is performed. As the number of times is increased, the extension time may be lengthened.

The difference calculation process may be performed only in the winning number counter update process, and may not be performed in the state display edit output process. The difference calculation process (step X806) in the state display edit output process is performed when there is an input to the out switch 98, and only the value changes in a direction in which no out number error occurs. There is no problem even if the difference calculation process is omitted.

Further, when the value of the total winning number counter area or the out counter area overflows, the value of the out counter area is set to 0. However, the value of the difference counter area may be set as the value of the out counter area. good.

In addition, although the value of the difference counter area is maintained at the maximum value compared with the value before the update, the calculated difference may be set as it is. Also, when it was determined that an out number error occurred, the value of the difference counter area was changed to the out number error occurrence determination number.
It may be changed to a smaller value, or 0 may be cleared. Further, when it is determined that an out number error has occurred, all of the values of the total winning number counter area, the value of the out counter area, and the value of the difference counter area may be changed to the out number error occurrence determination number. It may be good, may be changed to a smaller value, or may be cleared to zero.

In addition, the value of the total winning number counter area, the value of the out counter area, and the value of the difference counter area are updated even in the out number error notification state, but the values of all areas are updated in the out number error notification state. You may not make it. Further, in the out number error notification state, payout based on winning in the winning opening may not be performed.

In addition, the out number error occurrence determination number may be changed according to a predetermined condition. For example,
The out number error occurrence determination number may be changed according to the gaming state. As a gaming state,
There are no time saving state, time saving state, special gaming state and the like. In the short-time state, the winning frequency is higher than that in the no-time state, and in the special gaming state, the winning frequency is higher than in the short-time state. For this reason, in the time-saving state or the special game state, the number of out-number errors occurrence determination may be made larger than that in the state without time reduction. Furthermore, the out-number error occurrence determination number may be increased in the special gaming state than in the short-time state.

In this case, when shifting to a gaming state with a small number of out-number error occurrence determination, if the value of the difference counter area before transition exceeds the out-number error occurrence determination number in the gaming state after transition, It may be determined that an out number error has occurred. For this reason, the value of the difference counter area is changed to a value equal to or less than the number of out-error occurrence determinations in the gaming state after the transfer.

In addition, all the values of the total winning number counter area, the values of the out counter area, and the values of the difference counter area may be cleared to 0 every predetermined time. The fixed time is, for example, a time earlier than the time until the value of the out counter area reaches the upper limit value when the game ball is continuously fired.

In the above-described embodiment, the total winning number counter, the out counter, and the difference counter are used. However, the out number error may be detected by one counter. In this case, the counter is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the out switch 98, and the counter is updated by -1 based on the detection signal from the winning opening, and the value of the counter is the out number error occurrence determination number (for example, -13). If it falls below the threshold, it is determined that an out number error has occurred.

In this case, since the detection signal from the out switch 98 is usually larger than the detection signal from the winning opening, it becomes difficult to detect the occurrence of the out number error as time elapses from the time when the counter is 0. . Therefore, the upper limit value of the counter is not so large (for example, 2
55) may be set to occur at a certain frequency due to overflow. Further, the counter may be cleared to 0 every time a certain period elapses.

Also, when the difference exceeds the out number error occurrence determination number, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. However, when the difference exceeds the out number error occurrence determination number, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. The determination method and the out number error occurrence determination number can be arbitrarily selected. Furthermore, not only the determination of the out number error, but when processing is performed by comparing the acquired value with the determination value, whether or not the value exceeds the determination value may be used as a determination criterion. It is good also as a judgment standard.

[First Modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification can select a variation pattern for executing the skip effect in the game control device 100.

105 and 106 show variation patterns of the special map variation display game. FIG. 105 shows the contents of the variation pattern table in which the variation pattern type and the selection rate are defined in the normal gaming state (low probability state). A common variation pattern table is used for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. 105 (a) to 105 (c) are views of FIG. 10 of the first embodiment.
It is the same as 5 (a) to (c). The gaming machine of this modification includes a big hit fluctuation pattern table 2 in FIG. 105 (d) and a small hit fluctuation pattern table 2 in FIG. 105 (e).

The big hit fluctuation pattern table 1 in FIG. 105 (b) and the big hit fluctuation pattern table 2 in FIG. 105 (d) are different in that the big hit fluctuation pattern table 2 in FIG. 105 (d) has a fluctuation pattern without reach. Similarly, the small hit variation pattern table 1 in FIG. 105 (c) and the small hit variation pattern table 2 in FIG. 105 (e) have a variation pattern without reach in the small hit variation pattern table 2 in FIG. 105 (e). The point is different.

FIG. 106 shows the contents of a variation pattern table in which the types and variation rates of variation patterns in a specific gaming state (high probability state) are defined. A common variation pattern table is used for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. FIGS. 106A to 106C are the same as FIGS. 106A to 106C of the first embodiment. The gaming machine of this modification includes a big hit fluctuation pattern table 2 in FIG. 106 (d) and a small hit fluctuation pattern table 2 in FIG. 106 (e).

The big hit fluctuation pattern table 1 in FIG. 106 (b) and the big hit fluctuation pattern table 2 in FIG. 106 (d) differ in that the big hit fluctuation pattern table 2 in FIG. 106 (d) has a fluctuation pattern without reach. Similarly, the small hit variation pattern table 1 in FIG. 106 (c) and the small hit variation pattern table 2 in FIG. 106 (e) have a variation pattern without reach in the small hit variation pattern table 2 in FIG. 106 (e). The point is different.

105 (d), 105 (e), 106 (d), 106 (e) can be selected when the other special figure variation display game is being executed. In this situation, the ability to select a short fluctuation pattern without reach increases the possibility that the winning special figure fluctuation display game will stop before the other special figure fluctuation display game. It is easy to execute.

The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern without reach is set to 4000 ms. As shown in FIG. 94, the fluctuation time is the maximum execution time of the skip effect (t11 to t1 in FIG. 94).
3), which is 3000 ms, and the time required for stopping the identification information as a result of the shift in the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 when the effect button is not pressed in the skip effect (t13 to t14 in FIG. 94). This is a time equal to the total time (4000 ms) of 1000 ms.

When this variation pattern is selected, the production control device 300 starts the skip production immediately with the start of the special figure fluctuation display game. In addition, when this variation pattern is selected and the skip effect is performed, but the effect button 25 is not operated, the special result is stopped in the stop mode in which the identification information is stopped in the same manner as the stop mode in the case of the loss result. To be done. Thereby, if the special figure from which the fluctuation pattern is selected is the main fluctuation symbol, the skip effect is started in a state where the identification information is changing at high speed on the decorative special figure fluctuation display game display unit 85.

[Special figure information setting process]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. 107 is performed instead of the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. In this special figure information setting process, if the result is a big hit or a small hit in either the low probability state or the high probability state (step Y404; Y, step Y405;
Y, step Y414; N), it is determined whether the other special figure fluctuation display game is changing (step Y415).

If the other special figure variation display game is not changing (step Y415; N), the process proceeds to step Y412. On the other hand, when the other special figure change display game is changing (step Y)
415; Y) determines whether or not the remaining fluctuation time of the other special figure fluctuation display game is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (step Y416). As shown in FIG. 94, the predetermined time includes the maximum execution time of the skip effect (t11 to t13 in FIG. 94) and the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 when the effect button is not pressed in the skip effect. Then, the time required to stop the identification information as a result of the deviation (t13 to t14 in FIG. 94) is a total time.

When the remaining fluctuation time of the other special figure fluctuation display game is not longer than the predetermined time (step Y41)
6; N) shifts to Step Y412.
If the remaining variation time of the other special figure variation display game is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (step Y)
416; Y) converts the value by adding the conversion value to Table 2 to the first half offset data (
In step Y417), the conversion value to table 2 is added to the latter half offset data to convert the value (step Y418), and the process proceeds to step Y412.

Thus, in a situation where a skip effect can be executed, depending on the probability state and the result, FIG.
), (E), and the variation pattern table 2 shown in FIGS. 106 (d) and 106 (e) are set. In these fluctuation pattern tables 2, a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 4000 ms can be selected without reaching.

The other special figure fluctuation display game is not changing (step Y415; N), or the remaining fluctuation time of the other special figure fluctuation display game is not longer than a predetermined time (step Y416;
Even if it is N), when the other start memory is stored, the other special figure variation display game is continuously executed, so that the process may proceed to step Y416. In addition, FIG. 105 (d)
, (E), and the variation pattern table 2 shown in FIGS. 106 (d) and (e), only the variation pattern without reach may be selected.

[Second Modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of the present modification is provided with a certain grace period before the difference is calculated when a prize is won.

FIG. 108A shows an example of a change in value in each counter area in the first embodiment described above. This example has the same contents as FIG. As shown in FIG. 108 (a), the value of the total winning number counter is updated by +1 based on the fact that a game ball is won at any winning opening and a detection signal is inputted (a2), and the difference is accordingly increased. Calculated. Here, since the value of the out counter area is 0, the difference is 1. Since the value is larger than 0, which is the value of the difference counter area before update, 1 is set in the difference counter area. Thereafter, the value of the out counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the out switch 98 (a3). The difference is calculated as the value of the out counter area is updated. Here, since the value of the total winning number counter area and the value of the out counter area are both 1, the difference is 0, and the value of the difference counter area is updated because it is smaller than 1 which is the value of the difference counter area before the update. 1 is maintained instead.

Since the out switch 98 also detects a safe ball that has won a winning opening, if the value of the total winning number counter is updated by +1 when the game ball is won if the game ball is not in an abnormal state, the game ball is subsequently switched to the out switch. By detecting at 98, the value of the out counter area is updated by +1. Therefore, in this series of detections, since the total winning number counter area and the out counter area are both updated by +1, the substantial difference number does not change from the value before winning.

However, since there is a certain distance from the winning opening switch to the out switch 98 of each winning opening, it takes a certain time from the detection signal input from the winning opening switch to the detection signal input from the out switch 98. For this reason, when the value of the total winning number counter is updated by +1, the difference number is incremented by +1 (a2), and then the value of the out counter area is updated by +1 (a3).
), The value of the difference counter area that maintains the maximum value is maintained as 1, and a difference from the substantial difference number occurs.

Therefore, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), when the game ball is won at any of the winning holes and the detection signal is inputted, the value of the total winning number counter is updated by +1. (B
2) Set a grace period (5000 ms in this case) without calculating the difference immediately. When the detection signal from the out switch 98 is input within this grace period, the difference is not calculated based on the winning (b2) to the previous winning opening. Thereby, the value of the difference counter area can be set to a value corresponding to the substantial difference (b3).

In addition, after a game ball has won a prize and a detection signal is input, the value of the total winning number counter is updated by 1 and a grace period is set (b4), and then the game is out within the grace period. If the detection signal from the switch 98 is not input, the difference is calculated. If the calculation result is larger than the value in the difference counter area, the calculation result is stored in the difference counter area (b6). As a result, in the case where a fraudulent act in which only detection by the winning a prize switch occurs such as a fraudulent act with a fishing rod, the value of the difference counter area is increased, and the number of out-number errors occurrence determination (for example, 13) If it exceeds, it will be judged as an out number error.

[Winner counter update process]
In this modification, a winning number counter updating process shown in FIG. 109 is performed instead of the winning number counter updating process shown in FIG. In this winning number counter update process, instead of the difference calculation process (step X365), the initial value of the grace timer is saved in the grace timer area (step X
871), the value of the in-counter area is updated by +1 (step X872).

The grace timer is for managing the grace period, and 5000 ms is set as an initial value here. This time is a sufficient time from when the game ball is detected by the winning opening switch of each winning opening until it is detected by the out switch 98. The in-counter area is a counter for counting the number of winnings for which the calculation of the difference is delayed. As described later, the in-counter area is awarded based on the number of detections in the out switch 98 as many as the value of the in-counter area. It is determined that the game ball has been discharged.

[Status display edit output processing]
In addition, the status display edit output process shown in FIG. 110 is performed instead of the status display edit output process shown in FIG. In this state display edit output process, it is first determined whether or not the grace timer is 0 (step X881). If it is 0 (step X881; Y), step X8 is executed.
Move to 01. In this case, the grace timer is already 0 and it is out of the grace period.

If the grace timer is not 0 (step X881; N), that is, within the grace period, the grace timer is updated by -1 (step X882), and it is determined whether the grace timer has become 0 (step X883). . If the grace timer is not 0 (step X883
N), that is, if the grace period has not ended, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the out switch (step X884). When there is no input to the out switch (step X884; N
) Proceeds to Step X801.

If there is an input to the out switch (step X884; Y), the value of the in-counter area is updated by -1 (step X885), and it is determined whether the value of the in-counter area has become 0 (step X886). If the value of the in-counter area is not 0 (step X
886; N) shifts to Step X801. Further, when the value of the in-counter area is 0 (step X886; Y), that is, when the discharge of the game ball corresponding to the number of winnings for which the calculation of the difference is postponed is detected, the postponement timer area is cleared to 0. (Step X887)
The process proceeds to step X801. This ends the grace period.

On the other hand, when the grace timer becomes 0 (step X883; Y), that is, when the grace period ends, a difference calculation process is performed (step X888). This difference calculation process is shown in FIG.
It is the process shown in. Thereafter, the in-counter area is cleared to 0 (step X889), the grace timer area is cleared to 0 (step X890), and the process proceeds to step X801.

In this state display edit output process, there is an input to the out switch (step X80
1; Y) When the out counter area does not overflow (step X805; N), the difference calculation process (step X806) that has been performed is not performed. Since the difference calculation process (step X806) here is performed when the value in the out counter area increases and the value changes in a direction in which no out number error occurs, there is no problem even if it is omitted. Of course, the difference calculation process may be performed.

In the above description, the difference calculation process is not performed in the winning number counter updating process so that the detection by the winning opening switch is not immediately reflected in the difference number. However, the difference number is not reflected in the winning number counter updating process. It is also possible to delay the time when the calculation result is reflected in the difference counter area. If the same number of out switches 98 as the number of winnings that are graced are detected during the grace period, the calculation result is discarded.

Further, when the value of the in-counter area exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 20), the difference calculation process may be performed without setting a grace period. If a new win occurs during the grace period,
A new grace period will be set from the prize, but if the period in which the prize is not reflected in the difference number becomes too long, detection of fraud may be delayed, so the grace period is reset a predetermined number of times. In the case of failure, a difference calculation process may be performed without setting a grace period, and an abnormality may be detected.

In addition, a winning ball out switch for detecting the gaming ball when the gaming ball detected by the winning port switch is discharged may be provided separately from the out switch 98. In the above-described example, the detection by the out switch 98 is based on a game ball (safe ball) won in the winning opening, or the out opening 30
Since it is not distinguished whether it is due to the game ball (out ball) discharged from a, for example, the game ball discharged from the out port 30a within the grace period after the detection by the winning port switch is out switch Even if detected at 98, it was considered normal. By providing a winning ball out switch, it is possible to confirm the discharge of game balls won in the winning slot, and if there is a detection at the winning ball switch after the detection at the winning slot switch, it is considered normal Thus, it is possible to more accurately discriminate fraud.

Note that the out switch 98 may detect the game ball detected by the winning ball out switch, or may not detect the gaming ball detected by the winning ball out switch. When the out switch 98 detects the game ball detected by the winning ball out switch, only the detection by the out switch 98 is counted in the out counter area. Further, when the out switch 98 does not detect the game ball detected by the winning ball out switch, a value obtained by adding both the detection by the out switch 98 and the detection by the winning ball out switch is calculated in the out counter area. Try to count. In addition, the winning ball out switch may be one that collectively detects the discharge of the game balls won in each winning opening, or the discharge of the winning game ball is individually detected for each winning opening. Also good.

As described above, a game area where a game ball can flow down in a gaming machine that generates a state advantageous to a player when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game becomes a special result. 32, and a winning area provided in the game area 32, in which a game ball can be won (first start winning port 36, normal variation winning device 37, second starting winning port 97, first special variable winning device 38, second
Special variable winning device 39, general winning port 35) and winning detection sensors (starting port 1 switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a, starting port 3 switch 9) capable of detecting the game balls won in the winning area.
7a, upper university prize opening switch 38a, lower university prize opening switch 39a, prize opening switch 35a)
And a discharge sensor (out switch 98) capable of detecting a game ball discharged from the game area 32
And a control means (game control device 100) that performs control based on detection signals from the winning detection sensor and the discharge sensor, and the control means counts the total winning number counter (game) that counts the number of detections by the winning detection sensor. The control device 100), the total discharge number counter (game control device 100) that counts the number detected by the discharge sensor, and the difference number that is the value that the total winning number counter value exceeds the total discharge number counter value. Calculating means (game control device 100), configured to notify the occurrence of an abnormality when the number of differences exceeds a predetermined number, until a predetermined grace period elapses from detection by the winning detection sensor Means that the detection by the winning detection sensor is not reflected in the difference number. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a difference from the substantial difference number from occurring, to detect the illegal act reliably, and to prevent erroneous detection.

In addition, the control means ends the grace period during the grace period when the discharge sensor detects the same number as the number detected by the winning detection sensor that graces the reflection to the difference number. It will be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the grace period from continuing more than necessary.

In addition, when the number of detections in the discharge sensor during the grace period is less than the number of detections in the winning detection sensor that graces the reflection to the difference number, the control means graces the reflection to the difference number. A value obtained by subtracting the number detected by the discharge sensor during the grace period from the number detected by the winning detection sensor is reflected in the difference number. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect an illegal act in which only detection by the winning detection sensor occurs.

[Third Modification]
Next, a third modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine of the first modified example described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of the present modification is provided with a certain grace period before the difference is calculated when a prize is won.

[Winner counter update process]
In this modification, the state display edit output process shown in FIG. 111 is performed instead of the state display edit output process shown in FIG. In this status display edit output process, when the grace period is 0 and the grace period ends (step X883; Y), the value of the in-counter area is first loaded instead of the difference calculation process (step X888). (Step X901) The loaded value and the value of the difference counter area are added (Step X902), and the addition result is saved in the difference counter area (Step X903).

As a result, the number of winnings that have not been detected by the out switch 98 corresponding to the detection by the winning opening switch is added to the value of the difference counter area. Even if this is done, the value of the difference counter area increases and the number of occurrences of out-number error occurrences is determined when fraudulent acts that only occur with detection of the prize opening switch, such as fraudulent acts with thread fishing balls. (For example, 13
) Is exceeded, it will be determined as an out number error. In addition, since it is not necessary to provide a total winning number counter area or an out counter area, and further no difference calculation process is required, it is possible to reduce the burden of control related to detection of fraud.

If the value of the in-counter area exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 20), the value of the in-counter area may be added to the value of the difference counter area without setting a grace period. If a new win occurs during the grace period, a new grace period will be set from that prize, but if the period that is not reflected in the number of differences becomes too long, fraud detection may be delayed, When the grace period is reset a predetermined number of times, the difference calculation process may be performed without setting the grace period, and the abnormality may be detected.

In addition, by adding the value of the in-counter area to the difference counter area, the values of the in-counter area remaining in a plurality of grace periods are added together, but the in-counter area remaining in one grace period The occurrence of an abnormality may be determined based only on the value of. The one-time grace period is a period from when the grace period is started without being in the grace period until the grace timer becomes 0 or cleared. If a new win occurs during the grace period and a new grace period is set from that win, the grace timer will not be 0, so the grace period before and after the new win is a series of grace periods. Grace period.

As described above, a game area where a game ball can flow down in a gaming machine that generates a state advantageous to a player when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game becomes a special result. 32, and a winning area provided in the game area 32, in which a game ball can be won (first start winning port 36, normal variation winning device 37, second starting winning port 97, first special variable winning device 38, second
Special variable winning device 39, general winning port 35) and winning detection sensors (starting port 1 switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a, starting port 3 switch 9) capable of detecting the game balls won in the winning area.
7a, upper university prize opening switch 38a, lower university prize opening switch 39a, prize opening switch 35a)
And a discharge sensor (out switch 98) capable of detecting a game ball discharged from the game area 32
And control means (game control device 100) for performing control based on detection signals from the winning detection sensor and the discharging sensor, and the control means sets a predetermined grace period from detection by the winning detection sensor, The occurrence of abnormality can be detected based on the absence of detection by the discharge sensor during the period. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect an illegal act of illegally outputting a detection signal from the winning detection sensor.

In addition, the control means resets the grace period based on the new detection by the winning detection sensor during the grace period, and the number of detections by the discharge sensor during the grace period starts and restarts the grace period. If the number of detections of the winning detection sensor that triggered the setting is insufficient,
The occurrence of the abnormality is notified based on the fact that the shortage number exceeds a predetermined number. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect an illegal act of illegally outputting a detection signal from the winning detection sensor.

Further, the number of shortages in a plurality of grace periods is totaled, and the occurrence of an abnormality is notified based on the total number becoming a predetermined number or more. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect an illegal act of illegally outputting a detection signal from the winning detection sensor.

[Fourth Modification]
Next, a fourth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification differs in the method of setting a value when the counter overflows. Also, the difference counter area is not used.

[Winner counter update process]
In this modification, a winning number counter updating process shown in FIG. 112 is performed instead of the winning number counter updating process shown in FIG. In this winning number counter updating process, when the total winning number counter area overflows (step X363; Y), a difference calculation process is performed (step X911). In this difference calculation process, as shown in FIG. 113, the process related to the difference counter area (steps X824 and X825) performed in the difference calculation process of FIG. 102 is not performed.

Returning to FIG. 112, after performing the difference calculation process (step X911), the difference calculation result is +1.
Update (step X912). Since the winning that caused the overflow is not reflected in the difference calculation, the difference calculation result is updated by +1 so that it is reflected in the number of differences. Then, it is determined whether the difference calculation result is greater than 0 (step X913).

If the difference calculation result is greater than 0 (step X913; Y), the difference calculation result is saved in the total winning number counter area (step X915). If the difference calculation result is not greater than 0 (step X913; N), the difference calculation result is set to 0 (step X914).
The difference calculation result is saved in the total winning number counter area (step X915). Thereafter, 0 is saved in the out counter area (step X367), and the processing after step X368 is performed.

Note that the difference calculation process (step X365) performed when the total winning number counter area does not overflow (step X363; N) is not performed here, and will be described later with reference to FIG.
In the out number error monitoring process shown in FIG.

[Status display edit output processing]
In addition, the status display edit output process shown in FIG. 114 is performed instead of the status display edit output process shown in FIG. In this status display edit output process, a difference calculation process is performed (step X921) when an overflow of the out counter area occurs (step X804; Y).
). This difference calculation process is the process shown in FIG. 113 described above.

Returning to FIG. 114, after performing the difference calculation process (step X921), the difference calculation result is −1.
Update (step X922). Detection of the out switch 98 that caused the overflow in the calculation of the difference is not reflected. Here, the difference calculation result is updated by −1 to be reflected in the number of differences. Then, it is determined whether the difference calculation result is greater than 0 (step X923).

If the difference calculation result is greater than 0 (step X923; Y), the difference calculation result is saved in the total winning number counter area (step X925). If the difference calculation result is not greater than 0 (step X923; N), the difference calculation result is set to 0 (step X924).
Then, the difference calculation result is saved in the total winning number counter area (step X925). Thereafter, 0 is saved in the out counter area (step X808), and the processing after step X809 is performed.

Note that the difference calculation process (step X806) performed when the outcounter area does not overflow (step X804; N) is not performed here, and will be described later with reference to FIG.
In the out number error monitoring process shown in FIG.

By the above processing, even if the total winning number counter area or the out counter area overflows, the information of the difference before the overflow is taken over, and the fraudulent behavior can be continuously monitored. If the difference calculation result is not greater than 0 (steps X913, X923;
In N), since the difference calculation result is set to 0, it is possible to reliably detect an illegal act. That is, when the game is played normally, the number of detections by the out switch 98 is larger than the number of detections by the winning opening switch. If cheating is started in this state, the period until the difference reaches the number of out-of-error errors may be increased and the detection of cheating may be delayed, but if the difference calculation result is not greater than 0, the difference is calculated. Setting the result to 0 makes it possible to reliably detect fraud.

[Out number error monitoring processing]
Also, the out number error monitoring process shown in FIG. 115 is performed instead of the out number error monitoring process shown in FIG. In this out number error monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the out number error notification timer is 0 (step X931). If the value of the out number error notification timer is 0 (step X931; Y), That is, when no out number error has occurred, a difference calculation process is performed (step X933). This difference calculation process is the same as that shown in FIG.
It is the process shown in.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the difference calculation result is larger than the out number error occurrence determination number (step X934). If the difference calculation result is larger than the out number error occurrence determination number (step X)
934; Y), that is, if it is determined that an out-number error has occurred, step X84 is performed.
Processes after 4 are performed. If the difference calculation result is not larger than the number of out-number error occurrence determination (step X934; N), that is, if no out-number error has occurred, the processing after step X847 is performed.

On the other hand, when the value of the out number error notification timer is not 0 (step X931; N), that is, when the out number error has occurred and the notification is performed, the value of the total winning number counter area or the value of the out counter area is set. It is determined whether there is a change (step X932). If there is a change in the value of the total winning number counter area or the value of the out counter area (step X932)
; Y) performs the processing after step X933. In this case, when the difference calculation result is larger than the out number error occurrence determination number (step X934; Y), the notification of the out number error is reset. If there is no change in the value of the total winning number counter area or the value of the out counter area (step X932; N), the processing after step X847 is performed. Note that it may not be determined whether the value of the out number error notification timer is 0 (step X931).

Further, when the value of the out number error notification timer becomes 0 (step X851).
Y), that is, when the value of the out number error notification timer becomes 0 in the current out number error monitoring process and the out number error is canceled, 0 is saved in the total winning number counter area (step X935); 0 is saved in the out counter area (step X936), and the processing after step X853 is performed.

FIG. 116 shows an example of a change in value in each counter area for detecting an out number error. Note that since the present modification does not include a difference counter area, the difference column means a difference calculation result. As indicated by a1 in FIG. 104 (a), when the values of the total winning number counter area and the out counter area are 0, the difference is also 0 (a1). In this state, when a detection signal from any one of the winning openings is input, the value of the total winning number counter is updated by +1 (a2). Here, since the value of the out counter area is 0, the difference calculation result is 1.

Thereafter, the value of the out counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the out switch 98 (a3). Here, since the value of the total winning number counter area and the value of the out counter area are both 1, the difference calculation result is 0. Next, the value of the out counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the out switch 98 (a4). In this update, the out switch 98 detects the out ball discharged from the out port 30a without winning any of the winning ports. By this update, the difference calculation result becomes -1. Thereafter, when the value of the total winning number counter area is continuously updated based on the detection signal from the winning opening (a5 to a7), the difference calculation result increases accordingly. Thus, the difference calculation result becomes a value corresponding to the value of the counter at the time of calculation.

FIG. 116B shows a case where an out number error occurs. In this example, first, the value of the total winning number counter area is 52, the value of the out counter area is 40, and the value of the difference counter area is 12 (b1). Then, the value of the total winning number counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the winning opening and the difference calculation result becomes 13 (b2). Further, the value of the total winning number counter area is changed based on the detection signal from the winning opening. +1 updated and the difference calculation result is 14
Thus, it exceeds 13 that is the number of out-error occurrence determination (b3). This
It is determined that an out-number error has occurred, and an out-number error notification state in which an abnormality is notified is entered. The out number error notification state is continued for a predetermined time (here 60000 ms) from when it is determined that an out number error has occurred.

In this modification, since the difference counter area is not used, the process of setting the difference to the out number error occurrence determination number after it is determined that the out number error has occurred is not performed. Further, when the value of the total winning number counter area or the out counter area does not change during the out number error notification state, the difference is not calculated (b4).

Further, the value of the total winning number counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the winning opening in the state of the out number error notification state (b5). The difference is calculated based on this update, and the difference calculation result is 15. This difference calculation result is the out number error occurrence determination number 1
Since it exceeds 3, it is determined that the out number error has occurred again, and the notification period of the out number error notification state is reset (extended). Thereafter, the value of the out counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the out switch 98, and the difference is calculated. Here, the difference calculation result is 14, and it is determined again that the number of out errors (b7).

Based on the detection signal from the out switch 98, the value of the out counter area is updated by +1 and the difference is calculated (b9). Here, the difference calculation result is 13, and it is determined that an out number error has occurred. Not. In this way, the state where it is not determined that the out number error has occurred continues, and when it is determined that the out number error has finally occurred (b7), the out number error notification state is canceled after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the notification period is reached. Ends. With the cancellation of the out number error notification state, the value of the total winning number counter area and the value of the out counter area are cleared to 0 (b10).

FIG. 116C shows a case where the value in the out counter area overflows. The out counter area of this modification can take a value from 0 to 255, and when it is updated by +1 in the state of the maximum value of 255, it returns to 0. In this example, first, the value of the out counter area is 254 (c1), and the detection signal from the out switch 98 is inputted, and the value of the out counter area becomes the maximum value 255 (c2).

If a detection signal from the out switch 98 is further input from this state, the value in the out counter area overflows, and the corresponding processing is performed. First, the difference is calculated without updating the outcounter area (c3). Then, the difference calculation result is updated by −1 (c4), and it is determined whether the difference calculation result is greater than zero. Here, since the difference calculation result is 0 or less, the difference calculation result is set to 0 (c5). Thereafter, 0 as the difference calculation result is set in the total winning number counter area, and the out counter area is cleared to 0 (c6).

If the maximum value that can be taken by the total winning number counter area is larger than the maximum value that can be taken by the out counter area, the difference calculation result in the processing when the value of the out counter area overflows may be larger than 0. Conceivable. FIG. 116 (d) shows an example of such a case.

In this example, first, the value of the total winning number counter area is 260, the value of the out counter area is 254 (d1), the detection signal from the out switch 98 is input, and the value of the out counter area is maximum. The value is 255 (d2). If a detection signal from the out switch 98 is further input from this state, the value in the out counter area overflows, and the corresponding processing is performed. First, the difference is calculated without updating the outcounter area (d3). Then, the difference calculation result is updated by −1 (d4), and it is determined whether the difference calculation result is greater than zero. Here, since the difference calculation result is larger than 0, the difference calculation result is set as it is in the total winning number counter area, and the out counter area is cleared to 0 (c5).
).

FIG. 116 (e) shows a case where the value of the total winning number counter area overflows.
The total winning number counter area of the present embodiment can take a value of 0 to 255 as a value,
When +1 is updated in a state where the maximum value is 255, the value returns to 0. In this example, first, the value of the total winning number counter area is 254 (e1), and the detection signal from the winning opening is inputted, and the value of the total winning number counter area becomes 255 which is the maximum value (e2).

If a detection signal from the winning opening is further input from this state, the value of the total winning number counter area overflows, and the corresponding processing is performed. First, the difference is calculated without updating the value of the total winning number counter area (e3). Then, the difference calculation result is updated by +1 (e
4) Determine whether the difference calculation result is greater than zero. Here, since the difference calculation result is larger than 0, the difference calculation result is set in the total winning number counter area as it is, and the out counter area is cleared to 0 (e5).

When the maximum value that can be taken by the out-counter area is larger than the maximum value that can be taken by the total winning number counter area, the difference calculation result in the processing when the value of the total winning number counter area overflows is 0 or less. It is also possible. FIG. 116 (f) shows an example of such a case.

In this example, first, the value of the total winning number counter area is 254, the value of the out counter area is 260 (f1), the detection signal from the winning opening is inputted, and the value of the total winning number counter area is The maximum value is 255 (f2). If a detection signal from the winning opening is further input from this state, the value of the total winning number counter area overflows, and the corresponding processing is performed. First, the difference is calculated without updating the total winning number counter area (f3).
. Then, the difference calculation result is updated by +1 (f4), and it is determined whether the difference calculation result is greater than zero. Here, since the difference calculation result is 0 or less, the difference calculation result is set to 0 (f5), the difference calculation result is set to 0 in the total winning number counter area, and the out counter area is cleared to 0 (f6).

As described above, a game area where a game ball can flow down in a gaming machine that generates a state advantageous to a player when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game becomes a special result. 32, and a winning area provided in the game area 32, in which a game ball can be won (first start winning port 36, normal variation winning device 37, second starting winning port 97, first special variable winning device 38, second
Special variable winning device 39, general winning port 35) and winning detection sensors (starting port 1 switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a, starting port 3 switch 9) capable of detecting the game balls won in the winning area.
7a, upper university prize opening switch 38a, lower university prize opening switch 39a, prize opening switch 35a)
And a discharge sensor (out switch 98) capable of detecting a game ball discharged from the game area 32
And a control means (game control device 100) that performs control based on detection signals from the winning detection sensor and the discharge sensor, and the control means counts the total winning number counter (game) that counts the number of detections by the winning detection sensor. The control device 100), the total discharge number counter (game control device 100) that counts the number detected by the discharge sensor, and the difference number that is the value that the total winning number counter value exceeds the total discharge number counter value. Calculating means (game control device 100), and configured to notify the occurrence of an abnormality when the difference number exceeds a predetermined number, and either the total winning number counter or the total discharging number counter overflows. In this case, the difference number is calculated, and if the difference number is larger than 0, the difference number is set to the value of the total winning number counter and the value of the total discharge number counter is set to 0, and the difference number is 0 or less. so The fact that so as to set to 0 Both the value and the value of the total emission number counter of the total winning number counter if you. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect an illegal act of illegally outputting a detection signal from the winning detection sensor. Also, fraud can be monitored continuously before and after the counter overflows.

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use this game ball. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses game balls. In addition, the configurations of the above-described modifications can be applied in appropriate combination.

In addition, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machines 32 gaming area 35 general prize opening (winning area)
35a Award opening switch (winning detection sensor)
36 First start prize opening (winning area)
36a Start port 1 switch (winning detection sensor)
37 Ordinary variable winning device (winning area)
37a Start port 2 switch (winning detection sensor)
38 First Special Variable Prize Winning Device (Winning Area)
38a Top university prize opening switch (winning detection sensor)
39 2nd Special Variable Prize Winning Device (Winning Area)
39a Shimodai prize opening switch (winning detection sensor)
97 Second start prize opening (winning area)
97a Start port 3 switch (winning detection sensor)
98 Out switch (discharge sensor)
100 game control device (control means, total winning number counter, total number-of-emissions counter, difference counter, calculation means)

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1
In a gaming machine that executes a game based on establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result,
A game area where game balls can flow down,
A winning area provided in the gaming area and allowing a game ball to win;
A winning detection sensor capable of detecting a game ball won in the winning area;
A discharge sensor capable of detecting a game ball discharged from the game area;
Control means for performing control based on detection signals from the winning detection sensor and the discharge sensor,
The control means includes
A calculating means for calculating a difference number between the number detected by the winning detection sensor and the number detected by the discharge sensor;
A difference counter capable of holding the difference number calculated by the calculation means,
The value of the differential counter is characterized determine Teisu Rukoto that an abnormality has occurred in the case of exceeding a predetermined number.

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that executes a game based on establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result,
A game area where game balls can flow down,
A winning area provided in the gaming area and allowing a game ball to win;
A winning detection sensor capable of detecting a game ball won in the winning area;
A discharge sensor capable of detecting a game ball discharged from the game area;
Control means for performing control based on detection signals from the winning detection sensor and the discharge sensor,
The control means includes
A calculating means for calculating a difference number between the number detected by the winning detection sensor and the number detected by the discharge sensor;
A difference counter capable of holding the difference number calculated by the calculation means,
It is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the value of the difference counter exceeds a predetermined number, and the value of the difference counter is set to the predetermined number.

Images